MAXIMA 2006 - Berline NISSAN - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free MAXIMA 2006 NISSAN in PDF.

View the manual :

Table of contents Click a title to go to the page

Manual assistant

Waiting for your message

Product information

Brand : NISSAN

Model : MAXIMA 2006

Category : Berline

Download the PDF manual Print

Download the instructions for your Berline in PDF format for free! Find your manual MAXIMA 2006 - NISSAN and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. MAXIMA 2006 by NISSAN.

USER MANUAL MAXIMA 2006 NISSAN

FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under- stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov- ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about ma ing and servicing your ve- hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- er's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, as- sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

A WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and complete trip for you and your passengers!

+ NEVER drive under the influence of al- cohol or drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted EE its and never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- priate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

ALWAYS review this owner's manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or per- formance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with- out obligation

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

A WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

À CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

H you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

S D Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

GARDENA, CALIFORNIA Al rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar- dena, California.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For US. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information

— Your name, address, and telephone number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side)

— Date of purchase — Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer's name — Your comments or questions

oR You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For US. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.0. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints … Exterior front Exterior rar... Passenger compartment

0-2 Instrument panel..… 0-3 Engine compartment check locations

0-4 Warning/indicator lights … ..0-5

Illustrated table of contents

Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-26) Rear head restraint (P. 1-8)

Rear seat belts (P. 1-10) Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag (P. 1-35)

Supplemental side impact air bags (P. 1-35)

Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9) Front seat belts (P. 1-10) Supplemental front impact air bags (P. 1-35)

Occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) (P.1-42)

Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-48) LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-25)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Engine hood (P. 8-9)

Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-20)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30) Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-19)

Windshield (P. 8-20)

Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39) Power windows (P. 2-37)

Door locks, keyfob, keys

Tire pressure (P. 9-11)

… Flat tire (P. 6-2)

Tire chains (P. 8-41)

Comering light (P. 2-20)

Fog light switch (P. 2-20)

Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-11)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

5. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)

LD Tie-down/towing hook (P. 6-12) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-30) Fuel filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-12, P. 9-3) 9. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-11) 10. Child safety locks (P. 3-5) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (P.3-16)

Sun visors (P. 8-15)

Interior lights, iluminated entry (P. 2-42, P. 2-20)

Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-89) Rear console (P. 2-85)

Rear cup holders (P. 2-82)

Front console (P. 2-34)

… Front cup holders (P. 2-32)

Park brake, parking on hills (P.5-12, P. 5-16) HomeLink® (P. 2-44)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

lllustrated table of contents 0-5

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch (P. 2-20)

Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-19)

Center and side ventilators (P. 4-16) Security indicator light (P. 2-15) Display screen/Navigation system* (P.4-2, P. 4-7)

Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-44) Audio system controls (P. 4-20) Climate controls (P. 4-17)

Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-35)

Power outlet (P. 2-29)

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P.8-13)

Steering wheel switch for audio control and Bluetooth® hands-free phone system (P. 4-33, 4-35)

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Traction control system (TCS) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28) Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-27)

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28) Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-24) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-26)

Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P.2-41)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- er's Manual (if so equipped)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

2. Engine oil filer cap (P. 8-8)

3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

4. Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) (P.8-12)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)

6. Battery (P. 8-13)

7... Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)

8. Transmission dipstick (A/T models) (P.8-11)

9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)

10. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)

> 11. Drive belt location (P.8-15)

12. Fuse block (P. 8-22)

13. Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

14. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity.

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page light light light ABS Anti-lock brake | 2-10 7, Engine oil pres- | 2-11 D Automatic 2-13 TT warning light sure waming transmission © light position indica- e Low fuel wam- | 2-12 _ nn (AIT tek Automatic 2-11 ing light transmission CRUISE main | 2-13 e an CRUISE check waming La Low windshield | 2-12 switch indicator light (if so washer fluid light equipped) warning light CS 5 ruise - Brake waming 2-11 &. Sest bel wam- 2-12 SET switch indicator light ing light and light chime Re. Front passenger | 2-13 2 Supplemental 2-12 A2 ar ag no Charge warning | 2-11 air bag warning light light light High beam in- 2-13 4 Door open 2-11 P= Trunk lid open 2-13 dico light warning light waming light (blue)

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats RE Child restraint installation on rear seat center Front manual seat adustment _— (5-passenger models only) or outboard passenger's side .…1-2 positions - 1-20 Front power seat adjustment_ LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for (for drivers seat and if so quipped for CHlildren) system. - . 1-26 passenger's seat) . . Top tether strap child restraint 1-26 Folding rear seat (f so equipped). Child restraint installation on front passenger

Head restraint adjustment .……

Active head restraint (front seats)..…. Seat belts . .

Precautions on seat belt usage

Booster seats. Precautions on booster seats . Booster seat installation on rear seat center (6 - passenger models only) or outboard

Child safety.… positions 1-33 Pregnant women . Booster seat installation on front passenger

Injured persons... seat... EE 7 Three-point type seat bel with retractor. Supplemental restraint system .… 1-85 Seat belt extenders … Precautions on supplemental restraint |

Seat belt maintenance . system .

Supplemental air bag waming labels. Supplemental air bag waming light …

Child restraints. . Precautions on child restraints

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this section.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER'S SIDE A WARNING

e Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle.

« After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pullthe lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat bel fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped.

A WARNING After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for driver's seat and if so equipped for passenger's seat)

e Do not adjust the drivers seat while

driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle.

+ Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in s:

e Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)" in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto- matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward wi slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage" later in this section). Also, the seatback can be re- clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve- hicle is stopped.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Seat lifter (driver's seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Manual Lumbar support (driver's seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down

(manual) or move the switch forward or backward (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

FOLDING REAR SEAT (if so equipped)

Interior trunk access

For models without rear center console, the trunk can be accessed from the passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

@ Push down on the button on the rear parcel shelf.

@ Fold down the passenger side seatback.

+ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat whenit is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci- dent or sudden stop.

e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child restraint.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or Shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- n, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

+ When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi- tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci dent or sudden stop.

e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear Seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reach through the opening and pull on the strap @ located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access, The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the release button.

For models with rear center console, the trunk can be accessed through the access panel be- tween the rear seats.

The panel can be locked using the master key to prevent unauthorized access. The valet key can- not be used to lock or unlock the access panel For more information on keys, refer to Keys” in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

LRSO241 LRSO240 WRS0134| Type À — Front Type B — Rear Adjust the head restraint so the center is level HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT AWARNING with the center of your ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

To adjust the head restraint forward or backward (Type A only), push it in the direction required.

Head restraints should be adjusted prop- erly as they may provide significant pro- tection against injury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats)

e Always adjust the head restraints prop- erly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effec- tiveness of the active head restraint.

+ Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Al- ways wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident.

e Do not attach anything to the head re- straint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occu- pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant's head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some ofthe forces that may lead to whip- lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de- scribed earlier in this section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

SEAT BELTS Sit upright and well back. / Ye sS50136)

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE I you are wearing your seat belt properly ad- justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position in- cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Sit upright and weil back.

« Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly re- strained in the rear seat and, if appro- priate, in a child restraint.

e The seat belt should be properly ad- justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci- dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

e Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too increase the risk of internal an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.

The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats.

If the seat belt warning light glows con- tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- function in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer.

Removal and installation of the pre- tensioner seat belt system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, Should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un- less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

e All child restraints and attaching hard- ware should be inspected after any col- lision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child re- straints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front facing child restraint.

A WARNING Infants and children need special protec- tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not over their small bones. In an accident, an improperly ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

AI US. states and Canadian provinces or terri- tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See “Child Re- straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protec- tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in this section.

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Children that are over one year old and weigh between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for instal- lation and use.

Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). À booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat bel fit

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul- der belt in the child's seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat bel goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle por-

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. À booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt

without the booster seat.

A WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as pos- sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR A WARNING

« Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

+ For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts

@ Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

@ Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

e_ Theretractoris designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

e Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

@ Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have a locking mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode or child restraint mode.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When automatic locking mechanism is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the emergency locking mode. See “Child re- straints” later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passe: ger, the locking mode should not be acti- vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- fortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passen- ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

A WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se- cured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Unfastening the seat belts

@ Tounfasten the seat bel, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.

+ When the vehicle slows down rapid

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows.

I the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull out the adjustment button D and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position (@), so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- der belt anchor into position.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoul- der belt anchor up and down to make sure securely fixed in position.

e The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effec- tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

ff, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required.

by the same company which made the inal equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

e Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

+ Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud- den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

e_ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom- mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

ef dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properiy. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS A WARNING

A WARNING Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

+ NISSAN recommends that the child re- straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

e An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system. Some child re- straints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see the *LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- tem” later in this section.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes are offered by several manufactur- ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

e_ Choose onlyarestraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

e_ Checkthe childrestraintin your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system

e_Ifthe child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose à child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow al recommended procedures.

AII U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

A WARNING Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle.

Follow all of the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child re- straint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle.

If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being jured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e After attaching the child rest before you place the child from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the

int in another seat and test it

You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

e If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation on front passenger seat” later in this section.

e. LE your child restraint is not in use, secured with a seat belt to pre- Es it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

ACAUTION Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT CENTER

(5-passenger models only) OR OUTBOARD POSITIONS A WARNING

e The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor wi must be used when installing a child restraint.

e Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision.

e The 4-passenger model has seating and seat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the front seats and 2 in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating po: for a child restraint.

LRS0413 LRS0412 Front Facing (center for 5-passenger mod- Front Facing (outboard) — step 1 els only) — step 1 Front facing

When you install a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps:

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

@ Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the restraint manufacturer's in- structions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back. fnecessany, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Front Facing — step 2 @ Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer’ instructions for belt routing.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front Facing — step 3 © Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). lt reverts back to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Front Facing — step 4 @ Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Front Facing — step 5 © Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another rear seating position and try again or try a different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Checkto make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat bel is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

When you instal a child restraint in the rear seat, follow these steps:

@ Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the restraint manufacturer's in- structions.

Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1

Rear Facing — step 2 @ Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Rear Facing — step 3 @ Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). lt reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted

Rear Facing — step 4 @ Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear Facing — step 5 @ Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another rear seating position and try again , or try a different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles:

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Checkto make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) anchor points are located in the seat cushions of the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

e Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If acl restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH system anchors. The child re- straint will not be secured properly.

The LATCH system anchors are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- nected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compat- ible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the child restraint owner's manual. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating positions equipped with LATCH sys- tem anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors.

LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this section for installation in- structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps:

A WARNING Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system an- chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH sys- tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatible child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the seat. If the child re- straint is equipped with a top tether, see “Top tether strap child restraint" later in this section for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and before

placing the child in it, use force to push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Child restraint anchor points are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses.

+ After removing a rear seat head re- straint for top tether installation, store it securely to prevent it from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. Always replace it and adjust properly when top tether is no longer in use.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the anchor point provided behind its position.

First, secure the child restraint with the rear seat belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions), as applicable.

Remove the head restraint from the seat back. Store it in a secure place. Flip up the anchor cover for the anchor point which is located di- rectly behind the child seat. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seat back (D and secure it to the tether anchor bracket that pro- vides the straightest installation. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's in- structions to remove any slack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint installation instructions in this section and the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf finisher.

If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT A WARNING

e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags in- flate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child.

e NISSAN recommends that child re- straints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front pas- senger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. Also, be sure the front passenger air bag status light

luminated to indicate the passenger

air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this sec- tion for details.

e A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen- ger seat.

e The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint.

e Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Move seat fully back

WRS0379 Front Facing — step 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps:

@ Position the child restraint on the front pas- senger seat. It should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's in- structions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direc- tion and therefore must not be used il the front seat.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. Ifthe head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Front Facing — step 2 Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer’ instructions for belt routing.

Front Facing — step 3 © Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Front Facing — step 4 @ Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Front Facing — step 5

Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again , or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

8. Tum the ignition to the ON position. The passenger air bag status light should say SOFF" &,. If this light is not illuminated it may indicate a malfunction. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is full retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 07/07/05 —cathy =

BOOSTER SEATS PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS A WARNING

+ Infants and small children should al- ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while ing in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death.

+ Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself.

+ NISSAN recommends that the booster seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, cl are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

+ A booster seat must only be installed in a seating ion that has a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seat can result in a serious in- jury in sudden stop or collision.

e An improperly installed booster seat could lead to serious injury or death in an accident.

e Do not use towels, books, pillows or other items in place of a booster seat. Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death. Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de- signed to properly route the lap and Shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child’s body to provide the maximum protection dur-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

+ Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

e_ Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system

Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seat back must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat (TD) is chosen, the vehicle seat back must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seat back is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat (2) should be used.

I the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended pro- cedures.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

AII USS. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

° Improper use of a booster seat can in- crease the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle.

Follow all of the booster seat manufac- turers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle.

If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases.

Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt, make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen.

e Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child’s arm. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “Booster seat installation on front passenger seat” later in this section.

e When your booster seat is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to pre- vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident.

A CAUTION Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat.

Outboard position BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT CENTER (5 - passenger models only) OR OUTBOARD POSITIONS

À CAUTION Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic locking mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. When you install a booster seat in the rear seat follow these steps:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Center position for 5-passenger models only 1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

2. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

3. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions for adjusting the belt routing.

4. Pullthe shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Follow the wamings, cautions and instruc- tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor" earlier in this section.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON FRONT PASSENGER SEAT A WARNING NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the passenger's seat to the rearmost position.

If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rear-most position.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions.

The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions for adjusting the belt routing.

Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

6. Follow the wamings, cautions and instruc- tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor" earlier in this section.

7. When the ignition is turned to the ON posi- tion, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size ofthe child and the type of booster seat being used. See “NISSAN advanced air bag system" later in this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- tion contains important information conceming the driver and passenger supplemental front air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system: The NISSAN advanced air bag system can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The front seat side-impact supplemental side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag system: This system can help cushion the im- pact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

These supplemental restraint systems are de- signed to supplement the crash protection pro- vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu- pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish- ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only when the on switch is in the ON or START position.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Sit upright and well back. 7

e The supplemental front air bags ordi- will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Also, the front passenger air bag will not in- flate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger's seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this sec- tion. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

e The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre- strained, leaning forward, sitting side- ways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front bag if you are up against it whenitinflates. Always sit back against

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the seatback and as far away as practi- cal from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The advanced air bag system monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us- age then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and status light” later in this section

Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Sit upright and well back.

+ Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags, side air bags or curtain side- impact air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil- dren should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-f: g child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for details.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Do not lean against the door.

Do not lean against the door. ssso1ssl

A WARNING Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag:

e The supplemental side air bag and cur- tain side-impact air bag ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal im- pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se- verity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

+ The seat belts, the supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear out- board seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

e When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

ured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

e Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

WRS0466) 1. SRS curtain side-impact airbag mod- 6. Crash zone sensor ules 7. Occupant classification system control SRS curtain side-impact air bags unit Supplemental side air bag modules 8. Seat belt buckle switches for driver's Diagnosis sensor unit and passenger’'s side

+ mBswN Supplemental front air bag modules

-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Occupant classification sensor (pres- sure sensor)

10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

11. Side satellite sensor

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad- vanced air bag system for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warn- ings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen- tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may in- flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental front air bag system operation.

The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual stage inflators. It also monitors information from

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, seat bel buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat bel tension. Based on informa- tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turmed OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight de- tected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. fthe front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illumi- nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air bag and status light" later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system:

H you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. f you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairy loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok- ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas- senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision:

The supplemental front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Front passenger air bag and status light

A WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con- ditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- essary for most effective protection. Fail- ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger air bag status light Æf2 is located on the dash next to the security light near the windshield. The light operates as follows:

e Unoccupied passenger's seat: The #2 is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

© Passenger's seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The 2 _illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

e_ Occupied passenger seat and the passen- ger meets the conditions outlined in this section: The light #2: _ is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera- tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- matically tum OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in à crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- matically tumed OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). ltis in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. lt works together with seat belt sensors described later. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys- tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula- tions is on the seat, its weight and the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera- tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de- signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag system determines whether the front pas- senger air bag should be automatically tumed OFF as required by the regulations.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out- lined in this manual should not cause the passen- ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF; however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode), this could cause the air bag to be tumed OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. Ifthis is not possible, the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- tomatically tumed OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not iluminate when the front pas- senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat and the pas- senger air bag status light is illuminated (indicat- ing that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.

Ha child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the status light is not lit (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. In rare cases, the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though the air bag is OFF.

H such situations happen, properly position and restrain the occupant or child restraint. Other- wise reposition the occupant or child restraint in à rear seat. If you have any questions about whether your passenger air bag is working as designed, your dealer can use a special tool to confirm that it is working properly.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction ocours in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light %-. ; located in the meter and gauges area in the” center of the instrument panel, wil blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

e Do not place any objects on the steer- ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- jects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the supplemen- tal front air bag inflates.

e Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may se- verely burn yourself.

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system.

+ Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above th: istrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

e Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not speci cally designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica- tion system (pressure sensor).

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

e Work on and around the supplemental front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri- cal equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re- straint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unautho- rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

e A cracked windshield should be re- placed immediately by a qualified re- pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

e The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri- ate sections in this Owner's Manual.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact air bags system

The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo- cated in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guide- lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of- position occupants. However, all of the infor- mation, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side- impact air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate ifthe forces in another type of collision are similar

to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation

When the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The seat belts should be correctiy worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtain ide-impact air bags operate only when the on switch is in the ON or START posi- tions.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not place any objects near the seat- back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates.

e Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system. This is to prevent acci-

flation of the side air bag and

impact air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag system.

e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental side air bag and curtain si mpact air bag system.

e Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

e Work around and on the curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be mod or discon- nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur- tain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Front seats)

e The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be re- placed together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

e If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre- tensioner system checked and, if nec- essary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer.

e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system may result in serious per- sonal injury.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

e If you need to dispose of the pre- tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the supplemental air bag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac- tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt's retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated, load limiters allow the seat belt to release web- bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

I any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light ®%-_wil not come on, will flash intermit- tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on afterthe ignition key has been tumed to the ON or START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0169)| 1... SRS Air Bag Waming Labels (located on the sun visors) 2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (lo- cated on the door pillar)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Waming labels about the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying %- in the instrument panel, moni- tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side- impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tems. The circuits monitored by the supplemental air bag waming light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side- impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turms off. This means the system is operational.

H any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre- tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

e The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all

Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly. It must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has oc- curred. Repair and replacement of these supple- mental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve- hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple- mental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Once a supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag or curtail side-impact air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, if any of the supplemental front air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag mod- ule and pre-tensioner seat belt system should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired.

e The supplemental front air bag, side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag sys- tems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

e If you need to dispose of the supple- mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem disposal procedures are set fortl the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

2 Instruments and controls

Waming/indicator lights and audible reminders . Checking bulbs … Waming lights .…. Indicator lights … Audible reminders .

Security systems .… . Vehicle security system. . Nissan vehicle immobilizer system

Windshield wiper and washer switch Switch operation .

Rear window and outside mirror os so > equippec)

Headlight and turn signal switch. Xenon headlights (if so equipped) .….… Headlight control switch. …

Daytime running light system (Canada only) 2-28

Instrument brightness control .…. .2-24

2-2 Instruments and controls

Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch (P. 2-20)

Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P.2-19)

Center and side ventilators (P. 4-16) Security indicator light (P. 2-15) Display screen/Navigation system* (P.4-2, P. 4-7)

Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-44) Audio system controls (P. 4-20) Climate controls (P. 4-17)

Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-35)

Power outlet (P. 2-29)

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P.8-13)

Steering wheel switch for audio control and Bluetooth® hands-free phone sys- tem (P. 4-33, 4-35)

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Traction control system (TCS) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28) Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-27)

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28) Outside mirror controls (P. 3-17) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-24) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-26)

Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped) (P.2-41)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- er's Manual (if so equipped)

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

SDABWN LICO381| Warning/indicator lights 7... Odometer (total/twin trip) Speedometer 8. Fuel gauge Tachometer

Warning/indicator lights Change button for trip odometer Engine coolant temperature gauge

Instruments and controls 2-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and klometers per hour (km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position:

2-4 Instruments and controls

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the display as follows:

TpLAT — Tip[B] — Tip[ A] Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec- ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

Elapsed time, driving distance and average speed information is also available. Refer to “Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone ®.

ACAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera- ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range (D when the gauge needle points Within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

À CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera- ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the nor- mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is over- heated, continued operation of the ve- hicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required.

Instruments and controls 2-5

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is tumed to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters E (Empty).

2-6 Instruments and controls

The 4ÿ _ indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

À CAUTION ef the vehicle runs out of fuel, the NE malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips,

the QE light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few dri trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

e For additional information, see “Mal- function indicator light (MIL)” later in this section.

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in- dicates the direction of the vehicle's heading.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the -f- button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti- glare review mirror.

Push and hold the -ÿ- button for about:

Feature: (Push button again for about 1 sec- ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 seconds Compass zone can be changed to correct false compas readings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust- ments" section.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Pushthe -Â- button for about 1 second when the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the compass display (D on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle's heading.

Hthe display reads “C”", calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The com- pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles.

Instruments and controls

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:

1. Press and holdthe -Â- button for about 5 seconds. The current zone number will ap pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Pressthe “À button repeatediy to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display tumed on, press and hold the -f-_ switch for about 9 seconds. The displaÿ will read “C."

2-8 Instruments and controls

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

2. Calibrate the compas by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the display should return to normal.

e_lfthe compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer.

The compass may not indicate the correct compas point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.)

e Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- eration of the compass.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

ABS Anti-lock brake warning light

AT Automatic transmission check warning light (if CHECK | 50 equipped)

Charge warning light

BRAKE| or Brake waming light

Door open waming light

Engine oil pressure waming light

Low fuel waming light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

Seat belt waming light and chime

Supplemental air bag warning light

Trunk lid open warning light

Automatic transmission position indicator light (AIT models only)

CRUISE main switch indicator light

Cruise SET switch indicator light

Front passenger air bag status light

High beam indicator light (Blue)

SAMCE | Malfunction indicator light (MIL) SLIP | Sip indicator light (f so equipped) & Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped) & >) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights MDC | veñicie d snamic control off indicator light (f so

CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and tum the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on:

É ,erake or (D) , 7 , SF

2-10 Instruments and controls

H equipped, the following lights come on briefly and then go off:

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS Anti-lock brake warning light

H the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti- lock function ceases, but the regular braking system continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

AT | Automatic transmission check CHECK) Warning light (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light comes on for about 2 seconds. Ifthe light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic

transmission system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

BRAKE| Of Brake warning light

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light wams of a low brake fluid level. H the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following;

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the waming system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

© Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driv- ing it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

Ithis light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not func- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

ACAUTION Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Æ Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flckers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.

Instruments and controls 2-11

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

A CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se- rious damage to the engine almost imme- diately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

A This light comes on when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Low fuel warning light

Low windshield washer fluid warning light

Instruments and controls

[A Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition key is tumed to the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passengers seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is occupied (if so equipped). For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system" section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

I any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre-

tensioner seat belt systems need senvicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

e The supplemental air bag waming light flashes intermittenty.

e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- tensioner seat belts may not function properly. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint system" in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so equipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

| Tunklid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is not securely closed while the ignition key is in the ON position.

me Automatic transmission position indicator light (A/T models only) When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, the indicator in the speedometer shows the automatic transmission selector lever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual

Cruise main switch indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational SET| Cruise set switch indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is con- trolled by the cruise control system. Ifthe light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

| Front passenger air ba, A2) staturtignt

The front passenger air bag status light ( #2 ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.

O High beam indicator light (Blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

SRE] Malfunction indicator light SN] (MIL)

H this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on steadÿ ifthe fuel filer cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel filer cap is installed and closed tightly,

and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few dhiving trips, the #F light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi- ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual

The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways:

© Malfunction indicator light on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The 8 light should turn off after a few driving trips. Ifthe ÉSE light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-13

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

+ Malfunction indicator light linking — An en- gine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To re- duce or avoid emission control system dam- age:

— do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h).

— avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. — avoid steep uphill grades.

— if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

À CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav- ing the emi n control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission con- trol system.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light will blink when the traction con- trol system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road

conditions may exist ifthe slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly

SLIP The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or does not go off, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

æs | Traction control system off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the traction control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi- cates the traction control system is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or re- start the engine and the system will operate nor- mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)" in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will tu off after about 2 seconds if the traction control system (TCS) is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica- tor light while you are driving, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the traction control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerat- ing, but this is normal.

& >) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op- erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or ac- celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning

The front disc brake pads have audible wear wamings. When a front brake pad requires re- placement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warn- ing sound is heard.

A chime sounds ifthe driver's door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav- ing the vehicle.

SECURITY SYSTEMS LICO301| Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

e_ Vehicle security system + NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. AÏ-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

Instruments and controls 2-15

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Security indicator light (Vehicle security system)

The security indicator light @ is located on the instrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light shows the status of the vehicle security system.

The light operates whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, or ACC position.

The vehicle security system has four phases. For each phase the operation of the security indicator light is different.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Security indicator light operation

Phase Security indicator light output Disarmed Blinks every 3.0 seconds

|+—Pre-armed Steady light for

30 seconds |«—Armed Blinks every 8.0 seconds Alarm activated/ 7 Disarming alarm Nolight | 1c0053]

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key, power door lock switch or with the keyfob.

e Pushthe {f] button on the keyfob. All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked.

e Whenthe {À button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the hom beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked.

The hom may or may not beep. Refer to “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles with- out navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air condi- tioner, audio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light comes on. The SECURITY light stays on for about 80 seconds. The vehicle security sys- tem is now pre-armed. After about 80 sec- onds the vehicle security system automati- cally shifts into the armed phase. The SECURITY light begins to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is tumed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

e_Ifthe keyis turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm. Fur- thermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is re- moved. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again.

e Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors and trunk lid closed and locked with the ignition key in the OFF posi

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

© The alarm automatically turns off after ap- proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the button on the key- fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System wil not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

I the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro- cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds.

Repeat steps 1 and 2.

Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

Hthe no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Instruments and controls 2-17

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the ECC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper: is subject to the follow- ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER- ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

2-18 Instruments and controls

Security indicator light (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System)

The security indicator light (® is located on the instrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light blinks every 3 sec- onds whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indi- cates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal- functioning, the light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en- gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- vice as soon as possible. Please bring all keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed

@ intermittent — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward (@ (Slower) or (®) (Faster). Also, the intermit- tent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion. Refer to “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles without navigation sys- tem) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve- hicles with navigation system) in the “Dis- play screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

Push the lever up ® to have one sweep opera- tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you (®) to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

A WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

e Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds.

e Do not operate the washer if the reser- voir tank is empty.

+ Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser- voir tank.

e Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufactur. recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water.

Instruments and controls 2-19

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

2-20 Instruments and controls

À CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam- age the rear window defroster.

The top few rows of wires on the rear win- dow are not part of the rear window de- froster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)

A WARNING ANHIGH VOLTAGE

+ When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xe- non headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer.

+ Xenon headlights provide considerably more light than conventional head- lights. If they are not correctly aimed,

ly blind an oncom- ing driver or the driver ahead of you and cause a serious accident. If headlights are not aimed correctly, immediately take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer and have the headlights adjusted correctly.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

When the xenon headightis initial tumed on, its brighiness or color varies slightiy. Howewer, the ACAUTION color and brighiness will soon stabilize.

e The life of xenon headlights will be shortened by frequent on-off opera- tion. It is generally desirable not to turn off the headlights for short intervals (for example, when the vehicle stops at atraffic signal). Even when the daytime running lights are active (Canada only), the xenon headlights do not turn on. This way the life of the xenon head- lights is not reduced.

e Ifthe xenon headlight bulb is close to LICO560] burning out, the brightness will drasti- cally decrease, the light will start blink- HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH ing, or the color of the light will be- chti come reddish. If one or more of the Lighting above signs appear, contact a NISSAN (When turning the switch to the 2DQE posi- dealer. tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and

instrument panel lights come on.

Use the headlights with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

@ When turning the switch to the #2 posi- tion, the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on.

Instruments and controls 2-21

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:

Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au- tomatically when it is dark.

Turn off all the lights when it is light.

+ Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad- justed. See “Personalized settings menu” (vehicles without navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with n system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” section later in this manual.

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- tion (D).

2. Tu the ignition key to ON.

8. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initiall, if the ignition switch is tumed OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF,2DŒ ,or #D position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor (®) located in the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- ered, the autolight sensor reacts a: is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Headlight beam select

@ To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on andthe 20 light illuminates.

@ Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

@® Puling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

I the ignition switch is tumed OFF while the headlight switch is in the2Dd£ or D posi- tion, the headlights will tu off after 5 minutes.

À CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au- tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the head- light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM (Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi- nate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights oper- ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position orinthe 2Dd£ position. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO or 4 position for headlight illu- mination when driving at night.

the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illumi- nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is tumed off.

A WARNING When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Instruments and controls 2-23

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni- tion switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates when the headlght control switch is in the AUTO, 5Dd5 or #2 position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru- ment panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjust the brightness when the headlights or parking lights are off.

2-24 Instruments and controls

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

@ Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the tum is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically

@ To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH To turn the og lights on, tum the headlight switch to the #D position, then turn the fog light switchtothe #Ù) position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the #[) position.

To tum the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

CORNERING LIGHT The comering light provides additional illumina- tion toward the tuning direction. The cornering light will iluminate on the turning direction side when a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

Push the switch on to wa other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi- tions. All tu signal lights flash.

e If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

+ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other trai

e Turn signals do not work when the haz- ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

Instruments and controls 2-25

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

To sound the hom, push the center pad area of

A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

2-26 Instruments and controls

The front and rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if so equipped). The switches are lo- cated on the center consoles.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or Hi position of the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

+ Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

e Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

e Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat Should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

e When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- lar materials.

If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68°F (20°C)

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.

Ifthe surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C), then turn off automatically.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering off manually. The indicator light will go off.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the Steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-27

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con- trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

H the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, tum the TCS off.

To tum off the TGS, push the TCS OFF switch. The GE _indicator will come on.

Push the “TCS OFF" switch again or restart the engine to tu ON the system. See “Traction control system (TCS)" in the “Starting and driv- ing” section.

2-28 Instruments and controls

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- ing conditions.

H the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, tum the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dy- namic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving" section.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They

are rated at 12 Volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.

You can route a power cord through the opening

@ on the passenger compartment access panel.

+ The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.

Passenger compartment footwell

e Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information.

e Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

e Use power outlets with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Front center console

Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-29

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Rear center console (if so equipped)

2-30 Instruments and controls

This power outlet (@ can be used with an acces- sory cigarette lighter element. Contact your NISSAN dealer for information.

This power outlet can also be used for powering electrical accessories such as cellular tele- phones.

e The cigarette lighter should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

e The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.

Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter.

Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlets with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver's and passenger's seats, The pockets

can be used to store maps.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

e The sunglasses holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

e Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-31

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not use for anything other than

+ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the

Instruments and controls

CUP HOLDERS A WARNING The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

+ Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

e Use only soft cups Hard objects can accident.

the cup holder. re you in an

To open the front cup holders, push the cup holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push down until i clicks in place.

The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean- ing.

The rear cup holders are located in the fold-down armrest in the rear seat back or in the rear center console.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Rear — Type A To open the cup holders on the rear fold-down

armrest, lift the cup holder id. To close, lower the lid.

Rear — Type B To open the cup holders on the rear center con- sole, push the button. The cup holder lid will

open. To close, gently push the lid toward the center.

GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking ® or unlocking @ the glove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the glove box.

A WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-33

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

CONSOLE BOX A WARNING The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Push the button to elevate the armrest. To return armrest to regular position, hold the button in and push the armrest rearward until locked.

Pull up on the lever to open the console box. Remove the inside tray to store a large object.

The console box may be used for storage of cellular phones. Open the access hole cover @ to route a cord to the power outlet.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Pull up on the lever to open the console box

The light inside the rear center console box may COVERED STORAGE BOX (if so

be turned on () and off (2) with the switch. equipped)

Push the bottom center of the lid to open.

Instruments and controls

GROCERY HOOKS The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and can be used to hang a standard size plastic grocery bag

ACAUTION Do not apply a total load of more than 20 lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

2-36 Instruments and controls

CARGO NETS A WARNING

+ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sl shi

unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

+ Be sure to secure all four hooks into the retainers. The cargo restrained in the net must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) or the net may not stay secured.

The cargo nets (right, center and left) help keep packages in the cargo area from moving around while the vehicle is in motion.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

To install a cargo net, attach the net to the retain- ers.

To remove a cargo net, detach the net from the retainers.

WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS A WARNING

e Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while L in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

+ Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil- dren could become involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the windows is canceled.

Power door lock switch

Front passenger side

Right rear passenger side

Left rear passenger side

Driver side automatic switch Driver's side power window switch

The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all ofthe windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch

Instruments and controls 2-37

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Front passenger power window switch

The passenger window switch operates only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down ®. To close the window, pull the switch up @).

2-38 Instruments and controls

Rear power window switch

The rear passenger window switches open or close only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down ®. To close the window, pull the switch up

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock button is depressed, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down (only driver's side shown) to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window auto matically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pullthe switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse fun be activated if an impact or load something being caught in the window oc- curs.

A WARNING There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Ithe control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately low- ered.

SKYVIEW"" GLASS-PANELED ROOF SUNROOF (if so equipped)

Open or close the SkyView roof shade by sliding it from side to side.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is tumed to the ACC or OFF position. the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

To open the roof, slide the switch to the OPEN position (D. When the roof is tilted up, it will automatically tilt down and then open.

Instruments and controls 2-39

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

To close the roof, slide the switch to the CLOSE position (2).

The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosen by the position of the sliding switch

To fully open or close the roof, completely move the switch to the open or closed position.

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to the UP position (8). When the roof is open, it will automatically close and then tit up. To tit the sunroof down, push the tilt switch to the DOWN position ().

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following reset procedure to return sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the titing switch repeatedly toward the DOWN posi- tion to fully close the lid

2. Finally, push and hold the titing switch for more than 2 seconds toward the DOWN

position to reestablish the lid's home posi- tion.

The sunroof should now operate normally.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Auto reverse function (when closing or titing down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds afterthe ignition key is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof oc- curs.

A WARNING There are some small distances imme: ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof.

Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward.

Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi- ately tit up.

H the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep pushing the tit down switch within 5 seconds after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

+ In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. AI- ways use seat belts and child restraints.

e Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex- tend any portion of their body out of the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or wl the sunroof is closing.

+ Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening.

e Do not place heavy objects on the sun- roof or surrounding area.

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- ward or backward.

If the sunroof does not close

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)

e To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sun shade arm, arm rail and screen inlet port.

Do not allow children near the rear sun shade system. They could be injured.

e Do not place objects on or near the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

e Do not pull or push the rear sun shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

The rear sun shade operates when the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

The rear sun shade switches are located on the front and rear center consoles.

To raise the screen, push the upper side of the switch.

To lower the screen, push the lower side of the switch.

The switch need not be held down

e Do not place objects (such as newspa- pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screen inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the screen when it is extend- ing or retracting, causing improper op- eration or damage to the screen.

e Do not push the sun shade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

Instruments and controls 2-41

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result proper operation or damage the screen.

e Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doing so may elongate the screen. Improper operation or damage to the screen may result.

2-42 Instruments and controls

INTERIOR LIGHT Door ON OFF C5

The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.

e When the switch is in the ON position (D, the interior light illuminates, regardiess of door position. The light will go off after 30 minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

e When the switch is in the center DOOR position (2), the front and rear personal lights wil illuminate under the following con- ditions:

— Drivers door is unlocked while the igni- tion key is removed from the key cylinder.

Lights remain on for a maximum of 30 seconds.

— Drivers door is opened. Lights remain on for à maximum of 80 seconds after drivers door is closed

— Ignition key is removed from key cylinder. Lights remain on for à maximum of 30 seconds.

The lights will go off when the ignition key is in the ON position, or the driver's door is closed and locked

The lights will also go off after 80 minutes when

e When the switch is in the OFF position (@), the interior light does not illuminate, regard- less of door position.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The foot well and door step lights illumi- nate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after 30 minutes while doors are open to prevent the battery from be- coming discharged.

ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS LICO908

FRONT To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again.

ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The console light @ will turn on whenever the headiights are illuminated. To turn the console light off while the headlights are illuminated, push the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-43

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

REAR To turn on both personal reading lights, press the switchtothe 2% position (). To turn the lights off, return the switch to the center position.

To turn on a single personal reading light, press the switch to the 2 position à. To turn à single personal reading light of, return the switch to the center position.

2-44 Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT The light iluminates when the trunk lid is opened When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte- rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

els powered by your vehicle’s battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi- cle's battery is discharged or is discon- nected, HomeLink® will retain all program- ming.

Once the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original trans- mitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons Should be erased for security purposes. For additional information refer to “Program- ming HomeLink®” later in this section.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

+ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be- came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). À ga- rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in- creases the risk of serious injury or death.

e During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

e Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light @) blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end ofthe hand-held transmitter 1-8 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

8. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter but- ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

Instruments and controls 2-45

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator light on the HomeLink® flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- ing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other pro- grammed device, press and hold the pro- grammed HomeLink® button — releasing when the device begins to activate.

5. Ifthe indicator light on the HomeLink® blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink® to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per- son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- gram button located on the garage door openers motor to activate the “training mode". This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button.

2-46 Instruments and controls

Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open- er's motor and the “tr: ng light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for conve- nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- ing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink® button you've just programmed Press and release the HomeLink® button up to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink® button should now be pro- grammed. (To program the remaining HomeLink® buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE: Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” all previously programmed

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink®, continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro- gramming HomeLink®”) while you press and re- press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming).

When programming a garage door opener, etc. it is advised to unplug the device dur- g the “cycling” process to prevent pos- sible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro- grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- propriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS Hthe HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand- held transmitter information:

«replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- ruption.

© position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position — keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department, The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but- ton. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

8. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not af- fect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN I your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-roling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consul the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manu- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer- sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

This device complies with FCC rules part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This de- vice must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com- plies wi FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313 FCC I.D. CV2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-47

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

2-48 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Nissan vehicle immobiizer system keys.

Doors. Locking with key. Locking with inside lock knob . Locking with power door lock switch Child safety rear door lock.

Remote keyless entry system . How to use remote keyless entry system .

Trunk lid. Opener operation. Secondary trunk lid release

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- der chip and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip

À key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Recordthe key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. lf you lose

your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate:

8-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilzer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head

The master key can be used for al the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove box lock or rear seatback lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehii Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilier System keys. Your dealer can dupli- cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Afterthe registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

Do not allow the immobilier system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with salt water. This could affect system function.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and help keep out intruders.

e Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

+ Donot leave children unattended inside the vehi They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front (D of the vehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear (2 ofthe vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral ® (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors

Opening and closing windows

The drivers door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto- matic operation at the same time.

e_ To close the windows, turn the driver's door key to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Inside lock LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position (1), then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position (2)

8-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side), to the lock position @. When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver or front passenger side) to the unlock position ®).

When the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being acci- dentiy locked inside the vehicle.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

APD1010| CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM H is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn the interior light on, and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi- mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN dealer.

The keyfob will not function when: e_ the battery is discharged

e the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch.

À CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the keyfob:

+ Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. + Do not drop the keyfob.

+ Do notstrike the keyfob sharply against another object.

e Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures ‘exceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- ommends erasing the ID code of that key- fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing proce- dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

1. Close all windows

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch 8. Close the hood, trunk lid and all doors. 4

. Pushthe {f} button on the keyfob. All the doors lock. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the hom beeps once to indicate all doors are locked.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

e Whenthe {f} button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash twice and the hom beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked.

e_lfa dooris open and you pushthe {f button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Person- alized settings menu” (vehicles without naviga- tion system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (ve- hicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems" section later in this manual.

If you change the horn beep and lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the display screen will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode. Use the key- fob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display screen control.

Unlocking doors Pushthe {button on the keyfob once.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Pushthe button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds.

e_ The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait- ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and turning to the ON or START position, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Whenthe {À button on the keyfob is pushed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per- formed:

e_ Any door is opened

e _Akeyis inserted into the ignition switch and the key is turned from OFF to ON.

Opening windows The keyfob allows you to open windows

equipped with automatic operation simulta- neous|y.

e Toopenthe windows, pressthe {À but- ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec- onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing the A button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory

H the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting.

See “Automatic driver positioner" later in this section.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the #% button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button on the keyfob will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The trunk lid will open when using the key- fob even if the trunk lid release cancel switch is turned to OFF. See “Trunk lid” later in this section for cancel switch infor- mation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the Æ1 button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds.

The panic alarm stops when: e_ithas run for 25 seconds, or

«any button is pushed on the keyfob.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using the interior light

Pushthe {button onthe keyfob once totumn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior light" in the “Instruments and controls” section earlier in this manual.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

HOOD TRUNK LID LPDO184|

@ Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.

@ Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

A WARNING Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

If you see steam or smoke comi the engine compartment, to avoi do not open the hood.

OPENER OPERATION A WARNING

e Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex- haust gas’ the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The trunk lid opener lever is located below the armrest of the drivers door trim panel. To open the trunk lid, pull the opener lever out.

To close the trunk id, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the cancel switch located inside the glove box is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid release switch. It can be opened with the keyfob.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE (4-seat model only)

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold down the trunk compartment access lid and pull the rear seat trunk release handle ®. To close, push the trunk lid down securely.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE A WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi- nated release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light

The handle is located inside the trunk compart- ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR LPDO188|

OPENER OPERATION The fuel-filler door release is located on the driv- ers door. To open the fuel-filler door, push the release. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se- curely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

FUEL FILLER CAP The fuel filer cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder ® while refueling.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A WARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seriously injured i is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel Spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

e Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

ler. To reduce the risk of serious jury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill- ingit.

— Use only approved portable fuel con- tainers for flammable liquid.

e If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap E properly may cause the RÈKE mal- function indicator light qu) to illumi- nate. If the BE light illuminates be- cause the fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The NE light should turn off after a

few ng trips. If the ÉÈRE light

does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

e For additional information, see the “Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and Controls” section earlier in this manual.

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN OYS | à «

WPDO235| AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so equipped)

Push the switch ® to adjust the steering wheel up or down (2) to the desired position.

A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically on models equipped with automatic transmission when the key is removed from the ignition switch. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. The steering wheel moves back into position when the key is inserted into the ignition switch

For more information, see “Automatic drive posi- tioner” later in this section.

Telescopic operation

Push the switch ® to adjust the steering wheel forward or backward @) to the desired position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv- er's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MANUAL OPERATION Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever D forward and adjust the steering wheel up or down (2) to the desired position.

Push the lock lever back to lock the steering wheel in place

A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Telescopic operation

Push the lock lever @) down and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward (4) to the desired position.

Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place.

A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driv-

Ssideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

@ Toblockglare from the front, swing down the main sun visor.

@ Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed À CAUTION

+ Do notstore the sun visor before return- ing the extension to its original position.

+ Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- edly downward.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic anti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa- tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors" later in this section.

For information on HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls" sec- tion of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if so equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- cally dims according to the intensity of the head- lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position:

The indicator light @ will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

e the O button for inside mirrors without compass. 3-16 Pre-di g checks and adjustments

Do not hang any objects over the sensors © or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

e the © button for inside mirrors with

compass. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,

e the | button for inside mirrors without compass.

e the O button for inside mirrors with compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch @ to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch (2.

+ Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

e Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (if so equipped)

The outside mirrors will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti- glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror willilluminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

e the O button onrearview mirrors without compas. e the © compas.

button on rearview mirrors with

The indicator light will turn off

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press:

e the | button on rearview mirrors without compass. ethe Ô button on rearniew mirrors

equipped with compas. The indicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear- view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror” earlier in this section

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

g checks and adjustments

Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

À CAUTION Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped) The reverse tit-down feature will tum the se-

lected outside mirror surface downward to pro- vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or right position. Only one mirror can be selected at a time.

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). The selected mirror will turn downward.

The selected mirror surface will return to its origi- nal position when any of the following have oc- curred:

e_ The ignition switch is tumed OFF.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

If the outside mirror control switch the neutral position, neither mirror will turn downward when the shift selector lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For more information regarding this feature and how to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-down adjustment in the automatic drive positioner memory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner" later in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

The electric control type outside mirrors (if so equipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win- dow defogger switch to activate the heating function. Press the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two features:

Memory storage function EN © Entry/exit function (for automatic transmis-

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION Two positions for the driver's seat, steering col- umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. For vehicles equipped with automatic trans- mission, set the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position:

For vehicles equipped with manual trans- mission, place the shift lever in the N (Neu- tral) position and set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

3. Adjustthe driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system" section and “Tilting tele- scopic steering column” and “Outside mir- rors” earlier in this section

During this step, do not tum the ignition to any positions other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and staÿ on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the se- lected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).

If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- ing procedure.

g checks and adjustments

1. Followthe steps for storing a memory position.

2. While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- onds, press the button on the keyfob. The indicator light will blink. After the indica- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch, press the {button on the keyfob. The driv- er's seat and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position.

If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch, the keyfob automatically re-links. Procedure for storing the outside mirror positions for best visibility when backing up An outside mirror position for backing up can be stored for each memory switch (1 and 2)

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the engine.)

8. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at least 1 second to operate the automatic drive positioner.

Turn the outside mirror control switch to L (left).

Depress the brake pedal.

6. Move the automatic transmission shift lever

Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po- sition for backing up by operating the out- side mirror control switch

Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected in step 3 fully for at least 1 second

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the se- lected mirror position is stored in the se- lected memory (1 or 2).

Turn the outside mirror control switch to R (right). Repeat the above procedure to ad- just the right mirror position and store in the selected memory.

When the drivers seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors are not in the memorized position, the outside mirror will move with the initial tit-down angle.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Confirming memory storage

e Tum the ignition ON and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indica- tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec- onds.

e_lfthe battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In such a case, reset the desired positions using the following procedures.

1. Open and close the driver's door more than two times with the ignition key in the LOCK position.

2. Reset the desired position using the previ- ous procedure.

Selecting the memorized position

For vehicles equipped with automatic transmis- sion, set the selector lever to the P (Park) posi- tion.

For vehicles equipped with manual transmission, place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and set the parking brake.

The driver's seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position with the indicator light blinking, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (for automatic transmission model)

This system is designed so that the drivers seat and steering column will automatically move when the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver's seat more easily. (This feature is not available on manual transmis- sion model.)

The drivers seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up:

e_ When the key is removed from the ignition switch and the drivers door is opened

e_ When the drivers door is opened with the key turned to LOCK.

e_ When the key is tumed from ACC to LOCK with the driver's door open.

The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to previous position:

e_ Whenthe driver's dooris closed with the key turned to LOCK.

e When the key is turned from ACC to ON while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or can- celed. See “Personalized settings menu" (ve- hicles without navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems" (vehicles with navigation sys- tem) in the “Display screen, heater, air condi- tioner, audio and phone systems” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:

When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h)

e When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

e_ When the adjusting switch for the drivers seat is turmed on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

e When the memory switch (1 or 2) is not pushed and held for at least 1 second.

When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position.

e When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.

+ When the automatic transmission selector lever is moved from P (Park) to any other position.

3-22 Pre-di g checks and adjustments

e_ When the drivers door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. See “Personalized set- tings menu” (vehicles without navigation system) or “Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles with navigation system) in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems” sec- tion of this manual.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — without navigation system... 4-2 Names of components ….… 48 How to use JOYSTICK and ENTER" button. .. 4-8 How to use “BACK" button How to use “TRIP" button How to use “FUEL ECON" button Clock

How to use “EM (nglish/Metric) button How to use nr (maintenance) button . How to use the “SETTING" button.

Control panel buttons — with navigation system. . Names of the components.

How to use joystick and “ENTER button. How to use “BACK" button

Manual operation …4-10 Operating tips... ..4-19 Servicing air conditioner. .4-20

Radio ... FM radio reception AM radio reception . Satellite radio reception té: so equipped) . Audio operation precautions . FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) player Gpe AICD changer (Type B).

CD care and cleaning... Steering wheel switch for audio control

4-33 Antenna . 4-33 Car phone or CB radio. 4-34

Setting up the start-up screen How to use the “TRIP”" button... . How to use the “SETTING” button... Setting the display (Audio or HVAC Sep XD button... Ventilators . . Heater and a air conditioner (automatic) . Automatic operation .…

e Positioning of the heating or air condi- tioning controls and play controls should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

e Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.

e Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

e In case you notice any foreign object the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. lgnoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Reference symbols: “ENTER” button — This is a button on the con- trol panel

“Display” key — This is a select key on the

screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

T NAMES OF COMPONENTS : #/2 brightness control button (P. 4-6) . BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3) . Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-3) . SETTING button (P. 4-5) “ir (maintenance) button (P. 4-5) . TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-3) FUEL ECON button (P. 4-4) . TRIP RESET button (P. 4-3) 9. E/M (English/metric) button (P. 4-4) 10. Clock adjust button (hours) (P. 4-4) 11. Clock adjust button (minutes) (P. 4-4)

To turn off the screen, push the #/2_ button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO".

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND “ENTER" BUTTON Choose an item on the display using the joystick.

Push the “ENTER” button only when the use ofit is instructed on the display.

® N ® 8 & ND HOW TO USE “BACK" BUTTON This button has two functions. © Go back to the previous display (cancel).

I you press the“BACK” button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen

I you press the“BACK” button after the setup is completed, the setup will start over.

5:48 1 TIME 3# D6n BIST 48.1 oi CS) AVG 13nPH LHA0252

HOW TO USE “TRIP" BUTTON When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen.

TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) — TRIP 2 (TIME, DIST,

AVG) — OFF TRIP 1 and TRIP 2 record journey time (TIME — max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer (DIST — mile or km) and average speed (AVG — MPH or km/h).

To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the “TRIP” button or the “TRIP RESET” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

HOW TO USE “FUEL ECON"

BUTTON The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 km) and the distance to empty (dte — mi or km) wil_ appear on the screen when the “FUEL ECON? button is pushed.

Average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100 km)

The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the “TRIP RE- SET” or “FUEL ECON” button for more than approximatel 1.5 seconds.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display will show (----)

Distance to empty (dte — mile or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- ing calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

When the fuel level is low, the dte display will change to (*).

e_lfthe amount of fuel added while the ignition switchis OFF is small, the display just before the ignition switch is turned OFF may con- tinue to be displayed.

e_ When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CLOCK The digital clock displays time when the ignition key is in ACC or ON.

If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will not indicate the correct time. Readijust the time.

To adjust the time, push the “H” or “MP” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The time indicator will flash.

Touch the “H button to adjust the hour. Touch the “M” button to adjust the minute.

To finish the adjusting, press the “BACK” button or the screen will return to normal after 10 sec- onds.

HOW TO USE “E/M" (English/Metric)

BUTTON You can change the unit as follows using the “E/M” button.

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG Metrie — km, °C, L/100 km

nou ESA LHA0250| HOW TO USE wir (maintenance)

BUTTON Pushing the ar button will change the main- tenance menu as follows:

ENGINE OIL — TIRE ROTATION To reset the driving distance, push the nr button or “TRIP RESET” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

To set the distance, push the joystick to left or right.

To automatically display the Maintenance menu (ENGINE OIL” and ‘TIRE ROTATION") when the vehicle is driven the set distance, turn ON the service alert key.

To turn the service alert key ON, refer to “How to use the setting button” in this section”.

When the vehicle is driven the set distance, the MAINTENANCE screen will be automatically dis- played and the Maintenance menu (‘ENGINE OIL and “TIRE ROTATION") will blink.

To return to the previous display after the “MAIN- TENANCE NOTICE" message is displayed, push the PREV button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE" screen displays each time the ignition key is tumed ON until one of the following conditions are met:

e ufr button or “TRIP RESET" button is pushed.

e_ “Service alert keyis set OFF. e_the maintenance intewal is set again.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”

BUTTON Pushing the “SETTING” button will change the settings menu as follows:

DISPLAY ON/OFF LANGUAGE BEEP SET SERVICE ALERT PERSONALIZED SETTINGS MENU Display ON/OFF To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the “Display ON/OFF” using the joystick.

The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY OFF YES or NO”.

I YES key is selected using the joystick, the screen will tum off after a 2 beep sound and approximately 1 second.

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING” , trip control, air conditioner (except rear window de- fogger button) or audio button

The language can be changed to “English” or “Français” using the joystick.

If the beep set “OFF” key is selected using the joystick, the beep sound will not operate (except some caution beep sounds).

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

I the service alert “ON” key is selected, the information will be displayed when the engine oil and the tire rotation periods reach the preset driving distance.

Personalized settings menu

You can set the following electronic systems operating conditions using the joystick.

Slide back DR (driver's) seat on exit:

The drivers seat automatically moves back and returns to the original position for exceptional ease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock door logic:

This option allows you to select which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation

Oniy the driver's door «— All the doors Horn chirp with remote:

This option allows you to select the horn chirp mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air condi

If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the display screen will not show the current mode. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display screen control.

Lamps flash with remote:

This option allows you to select the hazard indi- cator flash mode that occurs when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob is pressed

If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control.

This option allows you to set the length of time before the doors lock with the auto re-lock func- tion.

Auto headlamp sensitivity:

This option allows you to set the sensitivity of the autolights.

ner, audio and phone systems

Auto headlamp off delay:

This option allows you to select the length of time before the autolights turn off.

Speed sensing wiper interval:

This option allows you to turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion.

Confirm reset settings:

This option allows you to reset all options to their default settings.

#12 BUTTON To change the display brightness, push the *#/2 button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brightness moving the joystick right or left.

no operation is done within 10 seconds, orifthe “BACK” button is pushed, the display will return to the previous display.

e Positioning of the heating or air condi- tioning controls and display controls Should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.

e Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

e In case you notice any foreign object i the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will use up all the battery power, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols: “ENTER” button — This is a button on the con- trol panel

“Display” key — This is a select key on the

screen. By selecting this key you can proceed to the next function.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS 1. XD brightness control button (P. 4-16) . BACK (previous) button (P. 4-3) . Joystick and ENTER push button (P. 4-8) . SETTING button (P. 4-11) TRIP drive computer button (P. 4-9) . DEST button* MAP button*

“For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER" BUTTON Choose an item on the display using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button for operation.

HOW TO USE “BACK" BUTTON This button has two functions. © Go back to the previous display (cancel).

I you press the“BACK” button during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen

If you press this button after the setup is com- pleted, the setup wi start over, and the display will return to the climate control or audio mode and Navigation screen:

SETTING UP THE START-UP SCREEN When you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, the SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on the screen. Read the waming and select the “l AGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Français) key then push the “ENTER” button.

I you do not push the “ENTER” button, the Navigation system will not proceed to the next step display.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

I you do not touch the button or screen key for more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or START-UP screen, the screen will change to TRIP screen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner's Manual.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

LE TRIP 1 8:33 CT FUEL ECONOMY [231] LU MAINTENANCE (KE ET " æ Enpeed Tina Fri Average Fus EG Fuel Ecunum =, Drning Distance ARR ie FAX ven Cost) Average Speod FRA ++ PH Distance to Empty rue PT re 78 mes a LHAO552| LHAO553] LHAO554|

HOW TO USE THE “TRIP" BUTTON When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following modes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if there are any) — TRIP 1 (Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average Speed) — TRIP 2 — FUEL ECONOMY (Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) — MAINTE- NANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and Tire Pres- sure — if so equipped) — OFF.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items

To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP 2 and FUEL ECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button or push the “TRIP” button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation interval.

To display the setting of the maintenance interval, select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

3 ENGINE OL 833 1 TIRE ROTATION 833 ec | mn | Mantanance Scheduie AC r Menienanes Sciwduie — ALERT © Dsniay Maintenance Notifction © Display Maintenance Notation atnnans D i Da LHAO555 LHAO556| LHAO483|

To set the maintenance interval, select the “Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy- Stick and push the joystick to right or left.

To resetthe maintenance interval, select the “Re- set” key using the joystick and push the “EN- TER? button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automatically when set trip distance is reached, select the “Display Maintenance Notifica- tion” key and push the “ENTER” button.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE" screen (‘EN- GINE OIL' and “TIRE ROTATION") will be auto- matically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:

To return to the previous display after the “MAIN- TENANCE NOTICE” screen is displayed, press the BACK button.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE" screen displays each time the key is tumed ON until one of the following conditions are met:

e “RESET'is selected.

e “Display Maintenance and Notification” is set OFF.

+ _the maintenance interval is set again.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”

BUTTON To adjust the various settings within the display screen press the “SETTING” button

After pressing the SETTING button a menu will be shown on the display screen which will allow you to program several functions such as the display Screen appearance, programmable fea- tures for your vehicles electronics system and other system settings such as your clock. To make a selection from this mode use the joystick and press the “ENTER” button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

SETTING THE DISPLAY (Audio or HVAC display):

The audio or HVAC reading can be displayed at the bottom of the screen. Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and air conditioner) key to be displayed at the bottom, by using the joystick and pressing the ENTER button to select or deselect he key. The setting condition will normally appear on the screen. To return to the setting screen, push the “SETTING” button or “BACK” button.

The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear af- ter pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting “Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” but- ton.

Vehicle electronic systems

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec- tronic Systems” key with the joystick and push- ing the “ENTER? button.

To set the various electronic systems operating conditions, select the applicable item using the joystick, and push the “ENTER” button. The indicator light, box at left of selected item, alter- nately turn on and off each time the “ENTER” button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON Indicator light is not iluminated — OFF

4-12 Display screen, heater, air con

joner, audio and phone systems

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle (au- tomatic transmission only):

With this option ON, the driver's seat automati- call moves back and returns to the original po- sition for ease of exit and entry.

Lift steering column when exiting vehicle (automatic transmission only):

With this option ON, the steering column auto- matically tilts up and returns to the original posi- tion for ease of exit and entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first:

This option allows you to select which doors will unlock first during an unlocking operation

Oniy the driver's door «— All the doors Keyless remote response — horn:

This key allows you to change the hom chirp mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

Keyless remote response — lights:

This key allows you to change the hazard indica- tor flash mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

If you change the horn beep or the lamp flash feature with the keyfob, the mode will not be changed with the display. Use the keyfob to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display control.

This key allows you to set the length of time before doors auto re-lock.

Display screen, heater, air con

Sensitivity of automatic headlights:

This key allows you to set the sensitivity of the automatic headlights:

e Higher- more sensitive, automatic head- lights will come on quicker when the head- light sensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay:

This key allows you to set the length of time before the automatic headlights turn off after exiting the vehicle.

Speed dependent wiper:

This key allows you to turn on or turn off the driving Speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and tumed on using the “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE- HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the default settings.

joner, audio and phone systems 4-13

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

System settings Language/Unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when selecting the “Language/Unit” key and push- ing the “ENTER? button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG Metric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using the joystick and “ENTER” button.

Clock Adjusting the ti

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and move the joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

After completion of the setting, press the “BACK” button.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Setting daylight savings ti

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust the clock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour. OFF: The current time is displayed.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

CLOCK SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS E3 TIME ZONE CORREEES 06.25 Vo DEEE - Eu LHAO567 LHA0568| LHA0563

Adjusting the time to the GPS: Select the “Auto Adjust” key. The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key. The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear. °

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

2. Select one ofthe following zones depending on the current location.

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen will appear.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to the selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default) setting.

With this option ON, a beep will sound if any audio button is pushed.

> BUTTON To change the display brightness, push the %/> button. Pushing the button again will change the display to DAY or NIGHT display. Then, adjust the brighiness moving the joystick right or left.

Ifno operation is done within 10 seconds, or ifthe “BACK” button is pushed, the display will return to the previous display.

Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilator slides.

Open or close the ventilators by using the dial. Move the dial toward the hollow circle to open the ventilators or toward the solid circle to close them.

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Rear window defroster switch

<&> Aïr recirculation button

$ OFF button for climate control system

e The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

+ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

e Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

e Positioning of the heater and/or air conditioner controls should not be done while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant

4-18 Display screen, heater, air con

temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Push the temperature control button up or down to set the desired temperature.

e The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically.

8. You can individually set driver and front pas- senger side temperature using each tem- perature control button. When the DUAL button or passenger side temperature but- ton is pushed, the DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off the passenger side tempera- ture control, push the DUAL button.

The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis- played and A/C indicator will turn off.)

2. Push the temperature control button up or down to set the desired temperature.

joner, audio and phone systems

e The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically

1. Pushthe ÿ defroster button on. The in- dicator light on the button will come on.

2. Push the temperature control button up or down to set the desired temperature.

e_ To quickly remove ice from the outside ofthe windows, set the fan speed to maximum.

e As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

© When the front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automatically be tumed on at outside temperatures above 23°F (—5°C). The air recirculate mode auto- matically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Push the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

Push the button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The indicator light on the button will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con- trolled automatically. To manually control the in- take air, push the air recirculate or fresh air but- ton. To return to the automatic control mode, push the same button for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculate and fresh air buttons) will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.

Pushing the MODE (manual air flow control) but- ton selects the air outlet to

74 — Airflows from center and side ventilators.

+4 — Airflows from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.

w — Airflows mainly from foot outlets.

#3 — Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets. To turn system off

Turn and hold the fan speed control dial all the way to the left (0 ) until the system turns off.

© When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top passen- gerside ofthe instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any- thing on or around this sensor.

joner, audio and phone systems 4-19

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

|06/22/05—tbrooks =1

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ- mentally friendly" air conditioning system.

A WARNING The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment.

4-20 Display screen, heater, air con

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and press the ON:OFF/VOLUME control knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, build ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- ences. intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- hicle may influence ra reception quality.

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- dio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in à moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These char- acteristics are completely normal in a given re- ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system

joner, audio and phone systems

Reception conditions will constantly change be- cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other ve- hicles can work against ideal reception. De- scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception

FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normal} limited to 25 — 30 miles (40 — 48 km), with monaural (single chan- nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is Within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter) static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo- mentary lutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- elite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal.

I possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.

Display screen, heater, air con

DIGITAL AUDIO LHA 0099]

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS Cassette player

oner, audio and phone systems 4-21

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Cassette tapes should be removed from the player when not in use. Store cassettes in their protective cases and away from direct sunlight, heat, dust, moisture and magnetic sources.

Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to become deformed. The use of de- formed cassettes may cause the cas- sette to jam in the player.

Do not use cassettes with labels which are peeling and loose. If used, the label could jam in the player.

If a cassette has loose tape, insert a pencil through one of the cassette hubs and rewind the tape firmly around the hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jamming and wavering sound quality.

Over a period of time, the playback head, capstan and pinch roller may col- lect a tape coating residue as the tape is played. This residue accumulation can cause weak or wavering sound, and should be removed periodically with a head cleaning tape. If the resi- due is not removed periodically, the player may need to be disassembled for cleaning.

Compact disc (CD) player

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) round discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ture is extremely high or extremely low. Decrease or increase the temperature before use.

Do not expose the CD to direct sun- light.

CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with finger- prints may not work properly.

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

e_The following CDs may not work prop- erly:

e Copy control compact discs (CCCD) e Recordable compact discs (CD-R) e Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

e Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc- tion:

e CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

10. CD play button 11. TAPE play/side select button 12. Tuning and AUDIO control knob

| (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BAL-

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

PROG/RPT button ON-OFF/VOLUME control knob PRESET A-B-C select button

Station and CD select buttons (1 - 6) FM-AM band select button

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TAPE play/side select button

11. SAT (satellite) radio select button* Tuning and AUDIO control knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE and BALANCE, SSV and NR (Dolby)

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- Stalled and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH CASSETTE PLAYER AND COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

(Type AY/CD CHANGER (Type B)

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

The tape deck employs a permalloy head which allows for improved reproduction of high fre- quency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise Re- duction) system.

ON-OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the ON-OFF/Volume control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was tumed off.

To tum the system off, press the ON.OFF/Volume control knob.

Turn the ON-OFF/Volume control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle has speed sensitive control volume (SSV) for audio (type B only) . The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE, BAL- ANCE, (SSV if so equipped and NR (Dolby) — Type B only)):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows

BASS — TREBLE — FADE — BALANCE — SSV (Type B only) — NR (when cassette playing, Type B only)

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers.

To change the SSV mode (Type B only) to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to right or left.

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON, turn the Tuning knob to right or left while cassette tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the OÙ mark is displayed.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li- cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo- ration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol DÙ are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until the radio, cassette tape or CD display reap- pears. Otherwise, the radio, cassette tape or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds.

Display CD text (Type A only):

To change the text displayed while playing a CD, press the AUDIO knob until “Display Mode” ap- pears.

Turn the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text will change as follows:

Track number +—— Track title «<—— Disc title — Track number

DISP (display) button (if so equipped):

This DISP (display) button will show text about CD or SAT information in the audio display.

To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows: Disc title «— Track title.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Once the display mode is selected press the tune knob to store your selection. If the tuning knob is not pressed after 8 seconds the display will re- fresh with the last selected display mode setting

e_ Track title mode displays the title of the se- lected CD track.

e_ Disc title mode displays the title of the CD being played.

Track number mode displays the number selected disc and the track that is currently being played on the disc.

Display satellite radio text:

To change the text displayed while listening to satellite radio, press the AUDIO knob until “Dis- play Mode” appears.

Tu the Tuning knob within 2 seconds. The text will change as follows:

Channel number +—— Channel name <— Artist +— Title <— Channel number

Pause/mute button (if so equipped):

To release the mute or pause, push the button again.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air con

FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM/AM/SAT radio select:

Pushing the FM-AM or SAT radio select button will change the band as follows:

AM — FM or SAT (Satellite)

When FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON, the radio will come on at the station last played

The last station played will also come on when the ON-OFF/Volume control knob is depressed

to ON No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT is displayed when the SAT button is pressed unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS" satellite radio service subscription is active.

If a compact disc or tape is playing when the FM-AM or SAT radio select button is pushed, the compact disc or tape will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

joner, audio and phone systems

[<<] L»»] TUNE (Tuning):

A WARNING The radio should not be tuned while driv- ing so full attention may be given to ve- hicle operation.

To manuallytune the radio, push the TUNE button (€ or BR ) or turn the tuning knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, hold either

the 44 or RP button down for more than 1.5 seconds. 44 DD] | SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK button ( [gd or BB] )for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

Push the |@@ or BB button for more than 1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. Ifthe f@@ or BB] button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT radio to the À, B and C preset button.

1. Choose preset channel À, B or C using the preset select button:

2. Select the station band that you would like to preset, either AM, FM or SAT.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 - 6) until a beep sounds heard. (The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man- ner.

I the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS) (if so equipped):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band) and/or SAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad- cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in large

cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display: © Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. e_ Station name, such as “The Groove”.

e_ Music or programming type such as “Clas- sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed.

PTY can be used to search for a certain program type. Certain areas have a limited number of stations that transmit RDS. Many stations trans- mit call letters and frequencies only.

Searching or scanning by program type may yield a limited number of sélections.

When PROG/RPT button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds during FM or SAT mode, the PTY name of the current tuned station is dis- played. During this time if the PTY data code is zero or the data is unreadable, the display will show NONE.

To change the PTY: 1. Press the PROG/RPT button.

2. Press the TUNE button (44 or bR )to chose a specific program type. Refer to the illustration.

The display will show “SEEK, SCAN?"

joner, audio and phone systems 4-27

3. After selecting a program type, push the SEEK button ( K°_or M1 )forless than 1.5 seconds within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY station will start. If you do not push the SEEK button within the 10 second pe- riod, the PTY mode will be canceled.

4. Push the M or Mi button for more than 1.5 seconds to scan the PTY name stations and stop at each broadcasting sta- tion for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. Ifthe M or Pl button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Cassette tape player operation

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, then lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door. The cassette tape will be automatically pulled into the player.

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the cassette tape will begin to play.

A WARNING Do not force the cassette tape into the tape door. This could damage the player.

I the system is tumed off by pushing the ON-OFF/VOL control knob with the cassette tape still in the player, the tape will resume playing when the system is turned back on.

<< DD | REW (Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): Push the Æ4 (rewind) button to rewind the

tape. Pushthe BR (fast forward) button to fast forward the tape. Either the REW or FF symbol iluminates on the display window. To stop the

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

REW or FF function, press the 44 (rewind) or (fast forward) again, or press the TAPE button.

APS (Automatic Program Search) REW, APS FF:

When the [@@ (APS REW) button is pushed once for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the program being played will Start over from the beginning. Push the _|d@-@ (APS REW) button several times to skip back several selections. The tape will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

When the BB] (APS FF) button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a tape is playing, the next program will start to play from the begin- ning. Push the BB] (APS FF) button several times to skip through programs. The tape will advance the number of times the button is pushed (up to 9 programs). Either the REW or FF symbol flashes on the display window while searching for the selection.

When pushing the |@4 (APS REW) or BI (APS FF) button for more than 1.5 seconds, each program will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, pushthe BB but- ton again.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

This system searches for the blank intervals be- tween selections. fthere is a blank interval within à program or there is no interval between pro- grams, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed while the tape is played, the tape program play is repeated. To stop the repeat play, push the PROG/RPT play button again

Metal or chrome tape usage:

The cassette player will be automatically set to high performance play when playing a metal or chrome cassette tape.

When Æ button is pushed with a tape loaded, the tape will be ejected.

When a tape is ejected while it is being played, the system will be tued off.

Compact disc (CD) player operation (ype À) A CAUTION

+ Do not force the compact disc into the slot. This could damage the player.

e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

Tu the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing.

I the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

the system has been tumed off while the com- pact disc was playing, pushing the ON-OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc.

8.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs can also be used without an adapter.

When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded but the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be tumed off and the compact disc will start to play.

Display screen, heater, air con

REW (Rewind), FF (Fast

When the 44 (rewind) button or BR (fast forward) is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed

When the @@ button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

When the BB] button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

Whenthe @@ or BI buttonis pushed for more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the D button

joner, audio and phone systems 4-29

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

When the PROG/RPT button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the play patte can be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT — 1 TRACK RPT — 1 DISC RDM

— ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: the entire disk will be repeated

1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated

1 DISC RDM: all tracks will be played random A | CDEIECT:

Whenthe Æ button is pushed with the com- pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.

When Æ# buttonis pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc ejects and is not re- moved, it will be pulled back into the slot to protect it (except 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs).

CDIN indicator appears on the display when the CD is loaded with the system on.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation (Type B)

+ Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player.

e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD button

If the radio or tape is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

the system has been tumed off while the com- pact disc was playing, pushing the ON-OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc.

To insert a CD inthe CD changer, push the LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select button (1 - 6), then insert the CD.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 - 6) will iluminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer.

When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded with the tape or the radio playing, the tape or radio will automatically be tued off and the compact disc will start to play.

<< ||») | REW (Rewind), FF (Fast Forward): When the #4 (rewind) or PR (fast for-

ward) button is pushed while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc will play while rewind- ing or fast forwarding . When the button is re- leased, the compact disc will retum to normal play speed

When the f@@ button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed.

When the ppf button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is play- ing, the next track will start to play from its begin- ning. Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

When pushing the @4@ or BB] button for more than 1.5 seconds, each track will play for about 10 seconds. To stop playing, push the button again.

To play another CD that has been loaded, push a CD select button (1 - 6).

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT — 1 DISC RPT— 1 TRACK RPT

— ALL DISC RDM — 1 DISC RDM — ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. 1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will be repeated.

1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur- rently playing will be played randomly

will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

e Press and hold the Æ button for more

than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, orthe Æ button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be can- celed.

When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.

The slot numbers (1 - 6) will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e_ A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by ZX rubbing the inner and outer edges with the 1 — side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

CD CARE AND CLEANING Type À Volume control switch MODE select switch POWER on/off switch Tuning switch

+ Handie a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

e_ Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

With the ignition key tumed to the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off

SON MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the mode in the following sequence: Preset À, Preset B, Preset C, TAPE and CD.

Push the tuning switch( V7 or ZX )forless than 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( 7 or ZX ) for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- ous radio station.

FF, REW (tape and CD):

Push the tuning switch ( V7 or ZX )forless 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the present program or skip to the next program. Push several times to skip back or skip through programs.

The automatic program search searches for the blank intervals between selections on cassette tapes. If there is a blank interval within a program

or there is no interval between programs, the system may not stop in the desired or expected location.

When playing a tape, push the tuning switch (CN or ZX) for more than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the tape.

To stop the FF or REW function, pressthe N/ or /N button for less than 1.5 seconds again. Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch V7 or NX for more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down.

ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window. À CAUTION

e Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor recep- tion or noise.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad- versely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

e A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some juris- dictions prol the use of cellular tele- phones while driving.

e If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- lar phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

e If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

À CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic con- trol system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufactur.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

e Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

e If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

À CAUTION To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner of a Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- vehicle phone module, no other phone connect- ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

module when the ignition switch is tumed to the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes.

e_ Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit wwwinissan- usacom/bluetooth for a recommended phone list.

You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- vice area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking ga- rage, near a tall building or in a mountain- ous area.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air con

— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area sur- rounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degrada- tion and wireless connection disruption

While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual.

I the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, please refer to “Troubleshooting guide” later in this section. You can also visit wwwinissan-usa.com/bluetooth for trouble- shooting help.

Refer to the cellular phone Owner's Manual re- garding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

joner, audio and phone systems

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex- posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi- ronment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 8 inches (20 cm) between the radiator and your body. This Transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmit- ter.

USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone System.

Hthe vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the amber light on the overhead console illumi- nates and the system is ready to accept voice commande. Ifthe /£ button is pushed before the initialization completes, the system will an- nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

+ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.

e_ Waituntilthe tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.

Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push and release the {£ button located on the steering wheel. The light on the overhead console flashes to signal you have entered a voice recognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro- phone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.

If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say “Help” and the system will repeat them.

I a command is not recognized, the system announces, “Command not recognized Please try again." Repeat the command in a clear voice.

you want to go back to the previous com- mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc- tion” any time the system is waiting for a response.

You can cancel a command when the sys- tem is waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or “Qui.” The system announces “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can also push the MODE button on the steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

Display screen, heater, air con

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commandés. Refer to the rules and examples below.

— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh", or

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh"

e Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh,

— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and

— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two shty two hundred.

joner, audio and phone systems 4-37

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continuing entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200 — “One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more.

«You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # at any time in any position of the phone num- ber.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

— “One five five five one two one two star one two three”

For best results, say phone numbers as single

CONTROL BUTTONS The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands- Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel. (£& PHONE/SEND Pushthe {£ button toinitiate a VR session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the #£ button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call. See “List of voice commands” and “During a call” later in this section for more information.

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

"22 PHONE/END Push the "O2E button to cancel a VR session or end a call.

GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad- ditional command options, refer to “List of voice commands” later in this section.

You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the £ button for more than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/SEND (fé ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END (MODE ) button to select a dif- ferent language."

3. Press the MODE button

For information on speaker adaptation, see “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this section.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan- guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). Use the following chart to select the language.

NOTE: Note: You must press the {£ button or

the "2% button within 5 seconds to change the language. MODE Current Press f£ Press MODE language (PHONE/SEND) | (PHONE/END) ‘gear to select to select English Spanish French Spanish English French French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the VR session will end, and the language will not be changed.

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu “Setup" ® “Pair Phone" (6) «New Phone” ©) Initiate from handset (B) Name phone €) Assign priority () Choose ringtone @)

1. Push the (€ button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commandés.

2. Say: “Setup” @. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commandés.

Display screen, heater, air con

3. Say: “Pair phone” (). The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces the next set of available commande.

4. Say: “New phone" ©). The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset ®).

The païring procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular phone Own- ers Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for instruc- tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel- lular phones.

When prompted for a PIN code, enter “1234” from the handset. The PIN code “1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed,

5. The system asks you to say a name for the

If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

joner, audio and phone systems 4-39

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level ®. The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more information on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone @. Follow the instruc- tions provided by the system or refer to “Setup” later in this section for more infor- mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phone number

“Cal” ® Number (speak digits)

1. Pushthe (€ button on steering wheel. À tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call @. The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commandés.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air con

3. Say the number you wish to call ®). For example, 555-1212 can be said as “five five five one two one two." See “How to say numbers" earlier in this section for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and an- nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial ©. The system acknowledges the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List of voice commands" later in this section.

When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the "SRE button

on the steering wheel.

If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone, press the MODE button on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List of voice commands" later in this section.

joner, audio and phone systems

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS Main Menu “Call” “Phone Book” “Memo Pad” “Setup”

When you push and release the É£ button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the com- mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before Speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a response.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

When you get used to the menus in the system, you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time. For example, say, “Call five five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record."

Also, when you get used to the system re- sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the £ button on the steering wheel. However, if you pressthe É£ button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session.

Main Menu “Cal” Name (speak name) (@) Number (speak digits) (E) “Redial! © “Call Back” P)

H you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you can dial a number associated with a name and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name.

Hthere are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the loca- tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers” and “Making a call by entering a phone number earlier in this section for more details.

Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle.

The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re- peats the number and begins dialing.

I a redial number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to redial" and ends the VR session.

Display screen, heater, air con

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re- peats the number and begins dialing.

I a call back number does not exist, the system announces, “There is no number to call back” and ends the VR session.

During a call there are several command options available. Press the f£ button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com- mands.

e_ “Help” — The system announces the avail- able commands.

e “Go back/Correction” — The system an- nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session and returns to the call.

oner, audio and phone systems 4-41

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e_“Send/Enter/Cal/Dial" — Use the Send command to enter numbers during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an ex- tension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four."

The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers, The system then ends the VR ses- sion and returns to the call

e_ “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com- mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode.” The system then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com- mand again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle.

e_“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it Use the mute command again to unmute your voice.

4-42 Display screen, heater, air con

If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to “off” for the next call so the other party can hear your voice.

Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu “Phone Book” “New Entry" @ “Edit” © “Delete” © List Names” @)

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system. Each name can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ- ated with it.

joner, audio and phone systems

Each phone has its own separate phone book. You cannot access Phone A's phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B.

Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.” If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again

Also, if the name sounds too much like à name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you confirmit is correct, the system asks for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other) For example, say: “Home.” The system acknowledges the location and asks for a number. For example, say: ‘five five five one two one two." See “How to say numbers" earlier in this section for more information.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and number. The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name. If you do not wish to store another location, the system ends the VR session

“Edit” © Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone

book entry or to add a 2nd, 8rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location. The system ac- knowledges and asks you for the phone number you would like to store with this location.

See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section for more information.

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and number, then announces that the entry has been stored. The system then ends the VR session.

Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book, all entries from the phone book, the current redial number or the current call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book, say a name or “AI entries” when prompted by the sys- tem.

The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back number, say “redial number" or “call back num- ber" when prompted by the system

Ha redial number or a call back number exists, the system deletes them without asking for confirma- tion.

Hthere is no number for the entry you are trying to delete, the system says so and ends the VR session.

Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book.

Display screen, heater, air con

The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete the system ends the VR session

You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the MODE button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Main Menu “Memo Pad” “Record” @) “Play” “Delete” ©

The Memo Pad records à maximum of 3 voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long

The system announces “Recording” and a tone sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly. When you are done, press the {€ or MODE button on the steering wheel.

À tone sounds and the system announces “Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end the VR session:

the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo.

joner, audio and phone systems 4-43

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR session

H there are no memos recorded, the system an- nounces “No messages to play." The system ends the VR session

The Delete command erases all memos. The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos.

“Pair Phone” @) “List Phone” “Select Phone” © “Change Priority" @) “Delete Phone” ©) “Select Ringtone” ©) “Bluetooth Off” ©

Use the Setup command to change options as- sociated with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

4-44 Display screen, heater, air con

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. Also, see “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section for additional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a sixth phone, the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicle's system, the system an- nounces the name the phone is already using. The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from the following commands:

e_ “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone” earlier in this section.

joner, audio and phone systems

Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace, the pairing procedure will begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in this section.

e_ “List phone" - See the description below. ist phone”

Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired. I no phones are paired, the system announces, “No paired phones to list.” The system then ends the VR session.

Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is turned OFF or you select a new phone.

Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The priority level determines which phone is ac- tive when more than one paired Bluetooth® phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 8, 4, 5).

H the new priority level is already being used for another phone, the two phones will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone À Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone À

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority

level. The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones, the system asks you to confirm this action.

When you delete a phone, the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted.

“Select ringtone” (F)

Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received.

The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands:

© “Ringtone” — The system plays à ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone. If you say no, the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit.

e_ “Silent” — The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.

Display screen, heater, air con

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of- dialect users to train the system to improve rec- ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory À and memory B.

I memory À is available, the system will use memory À to store the model. If memory À is in use and memory B is available, the system will use memory B to store the model. I both of the memory locations are in use, the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten.

joner, audio and phone systems 4-45

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location

2. Sit in the driver's seat with the engine run- ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis- sion in Park.

3. Press and hold the f£ button for more than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/SEND (f£ ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END (MODE ) button to select a dif- ferent language.

5. Pressthe f£ button.

For information on selecting a different lan- guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in this section.

6. Voice memory À or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin, the pressthe {£ button.

4-46 Display screen, heater, air con

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded

10. The system will ask you to say your name: Follow the instructions to register your name.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad- aptation has been completed and the sys- tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

e The É£ buttonis pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode.

e_ The vehicle begins moving during SA mode

e_ The ignition switch is tumed to the OFF or LOCK position.

During the SA mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

e_ phone book new entry © dial three oh four two nine

joner, audio and phone systems

setup pair phone memo pad play

eight pause nine three two pause seven delete all entries

call seven two four zero nine

phone book delete entry

dial star two one seven oh

dial eight five six nine two

setup change priority

call three one nine oh two

nine seven pause pause three oh eight Cancel

call star two zero nine five

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

dial eight three zero five one Home

four three pause two nine pause zero delete redial number

phone book list names

call eight oh five four one Correction

setup change ring tone

dial seven four oh one eight setup main menu

dial nine seven two six six memo pad delete

call seven six three oh one go back

call five six two eight zero

dial six six four three seven

Display screen, heater, air con

joner, audio and phone systems

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

System fails to interpret the command correctiy.

1. Ensure that the command is valid, See “List of voice commandés" earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

8. Speak cleariy without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: fi is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. f more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im- prove the recognition response for the speaker, See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earier in this section.

The system consistentiy selects the wrong entry from the phone book,

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the “List Names’ command. See “Phone book" earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .……. Three-way catalyst. Avoiding collision and rollover. Drinking alcohol/drugs and ring.

Ignition switch. . een Automatic transmission. Manual transmission . Key positions … . Nissan vehicle immobilizer system .…

Before starting the engine .

Driving the vehicle . . Automatic transmission (if so equipped) Manual transmission

Cruise control (if so equipped).. Precautions on cruise control . Cruise control operations.

Break-in schedule ..…... Increasing fuel economy Parking/parking on hills. Power steering Brake system Brake precautions Anti-lock brake system (ABS). Traction control system (TCS) (if so lequipped) Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system (if so equipped) . Cold weather driving. Freeing a frozen door lock . Anti-freeze Battery … Draining of coolant water Tire equipment Special winter equipment Driving on snow or ice . . Engine block heater (if so equipped).

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING A WARNING

e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

e Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- ous. lt can cause unconsciousness or death.

5-2 Starting and driving

e If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all dows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

e Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

e Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the © air recirculation but- ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

e If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommen- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- try into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger compartiment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, un- derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are bumed at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

e Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tion: the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- able loss of performance or other un- usual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

e Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

e Do not race the engine while warming it up.

e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER A WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any ve- hicle, loss of control could result in a colli- sion with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide side- ways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over- the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- straint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING A WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- duces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohot-related accidents. Al- though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- Scription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

IGNITION SWITCH OFF WSD0041|

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be tumed to the LOCK position and removed until the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

1 the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK position.

5-4 Starting and driving

To remove the key from the ignition switch

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi- tion with the key in the ON position.

2. Turn the key to the LOCK position 8. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park) position after the key is tumed to the OFF posi- tion or when the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ON position.

8. Tum the key to the LOCK position 4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch

The shift selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be tumed about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position:

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi- tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder.

A WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

MANUAL TRANSMISSION The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driv- ing.

The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

On manual transmission models, to turn the igni- tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON position, tum the key to OFF, push the key in, then turn the key to LOCK.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a tum clockwise from the straight up position.

KEY POSITIONS LOCK: Normal parking position (0) OFF: (Manual transmission model) (1)

The engine can be tured off without locking the steering wheel

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running,

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.

This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. lt automati- call returns to the ON position

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System wil not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.

Ifthe engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

Ithe no start condition re-ocours, NISSAN recom- mends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices

Starting and driving 5-5

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

e Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake and clutch fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

e_ Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

Lock all doors. + Position seat and adjust head restraints. e_Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

e_ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.

Check the operation of warning lights when the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See “Waming/indicator lights and audible re- minders” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

5-6 Starting and driving

. Apply the parking brake.

. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the driving positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully de- pressed.

. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

el the engine is very hard to start in ex- tremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

Ifthe engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accel- erator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- ing the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

À CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- onds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-8 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)

e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until sl g is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

+ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

+ When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation

The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before attempting to move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector lever into a driving gear.

Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned

to the LOCK, OFF or ACC posi

Starting and driving 5-7

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

A WARNING Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

Ifthe key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or

5-8 Starting and driving

any D (Drive) position, the shift selector lever cannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch. If this occurs, perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is stopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position. 8. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre- ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni- tion key to the LOCK position to remove the key.

Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the se- lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) position.

ACAUTION Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu- all.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis- played on the position indicator in the meter. When shifting the shift lever to the manual shift gate, the position indicator first displays M4 (Fourth)

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows: Mi M2 — M3 «— M4 — M5

M5 (Fifth): Use this position for all normal forward driving M4 (Fourth):

For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking would be advantageous.

M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downtill grades.

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than M4 range. This reduces fuel economy.

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

Move the selector lever to the — (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Retum the selector lever to the D position to retum the transmission to the normal driving mode.

+ _Inthe manual shift mode, the transmis- n may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving perfor- mance and reduces the chance of ve- hicle damage or loss of control.

+ _Inthe manual shift mode, the transmis- n may shift up automatically to a her range than selected if the en- e speed is too high. When the ve- le speed decreases, the transmis- sion automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

Ifthe battery is discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shift lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved ifthe battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- lowing procedure:

5-10 Starting and driving

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu- tral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Tum the key to the ON position to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location

the shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- matic transmission system as soon as possible.

A WARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- ing stop lights could cause an ac: injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift — in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- sion down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note that the 4-speed automatic transmission will be locked in third gear. For the 5-speed automatic transmission, the transmission will be locked in any of the gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con- ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the key back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating con- dition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission and repair it if nec- essary.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

MANUAL TRANSMISSION A WARNING

e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

e Do not over-rev the engine when shift- ing to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage.

e Donotrest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage.

e Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage.

e Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse).

e When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

To change gears, or when upshifting or down- shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly.

This vehicle is equipped with a short throw shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 8rd, Ath and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed.

To back up, lift up on the reverse lever and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely.

I it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits.

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas (less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]) and normal accelera- tion in high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m))

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1st to 2nd 15 (24) And to 8rd 25 (40) 8rd to 4th 40 (64) Ath to Sth 45 (72) Sth to 6th 50 (80)

Starting and driving 5-11

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

For quick acceleration in high altitude areas (over 4,000 #t[1219 mj)

GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1stto 2nd 15 (24) And to 3rd 25 (40) 8rd to 4th 40 (64) Ath to Sth 45 (72) Sth to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will en- sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR MPH (km/h) 1st 38 (62) 2nd 62 (101) Srd 87 (141)

ath _- Sth _- &th _-

5-12 Starting and dr

PARKING BRAKE A WARNING

e Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before di g. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.

+ Do not use the gear shi place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

+ Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

To engage: Pull the lever up @. To release:

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position:

38. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, push the button and lower com- pletely ©)

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

e_lfthe cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver.

e_lfthe SET indicator light blinks, tum the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

e_ The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, use the following pro- cedures.

A WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.

e On winding or hilly roads.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

e_ To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

e_ The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods.

e_ Pushthe CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out.

Starting and driving 5-13

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

e_ you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

e Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch When the vehicle attains the speed you de- sire, release the switch

5-14 Starting and dr

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

e_ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en- sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short- ened engine life and reduced engine performance.

Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.

Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- hicles.

Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling Keep your engine tuned up.

Follow the recommended periodic mainte- nance schedule.

Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- proper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

Use the recommended viscosity engine oil See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- tion” in “Technical and consumer informa- tion” later in this manual.

Starting and driving 5-15

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may and cause a fire.

e Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmis- sion models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.

5-16 Starting and driving

Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

1. Firmiy apply the parking brake.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi- tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position:

To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: @

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Tum the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: ©

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen- ter of the road if it moves.

Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

H the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in Sharp turns and at low speeds.

A WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off whi driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate.

BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. I one circuit malfunctions, you wil stil have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. lf the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- tance will be longer.

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down à slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

+ While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

e is not running or is turned g, the power assist for il not work. Braking will be

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctiy.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

Starting and driving 5-17

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main- tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv- ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

The anti-lock brake system does not operate at speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The speeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock brake system con- trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-

5-18 Starting and driving

ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road. Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve- hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The system detects the wheel rotation rate and elec- tronically controls the pressure applied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom- panied by noise usually occurs while the ABS system is operating. Such vibration and noise encountered during abrupt braking is not a prob- lem, but indicates that the system is functioning properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsa- tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock brake system off and turns on the ABS brake warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti- lock assistance.

Hthe light comes on during the self-test or while driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for repair.

e The anti-lock brake system is a sophis- ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac- cidents resulting from careless or dan- gerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery sur- faces will be longer than on normal surfaces even the anti-lock brake system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow cov- ered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. Always maintain a safe distance from the ve- hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re- spon: ity for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver.

e Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness.

When replacing tires, install the speci- fied size of tires on all four wheels.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e When installing a spare tire, make sure is the proper size and type as speci- fied on the tire placard. For tire placard locati formation, refer to “Tire plac- ard” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

e Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- tion of this manual.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (if so equipped)

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire may spin or slip. With the vehicle traction control system (TCS), sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability while accelerating.

When the traction control system is operat- ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

©_lfthe slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un- der slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully, See “Slip indicator light” and “Trac tion control system (TCS) off indicator light" in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual

e If a malfunction occurs in the system, the SIP and indicator _ lights come on in the meter panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction control function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like

a vehicle without the system.

does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when

driving and corn: ig on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the traction control system may not operate properly and the GA indicator light may come on.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs and bushings are not standard equipment or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the traction con- trol system may not operate properly and the a indicator light may come on.

Starting and driving 5-19

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the traction control system may not op- erate properly and the indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads.

If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the traction control system may not operate prop- erly and the Æë indicator light may come on.

e Thetraction control system is not a sub- stitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

5-20 Starting and driving

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability.

When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system is operating, the slip indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

e_ If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi- tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions. See “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In- struments and controls” section:

e_indicator light If malfunction occurs in the system, theSLIP and indicator lights come on in the instrument panel As long as these indicator lights are on, the traction control function is canceled.

the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system OFF using the VDC OFF switch, VDC functions will be tumed off. The VDC sys- tem will still try to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to one with more traction when the VDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicator wil flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working prop- erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

e The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stabil- ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indica- tor light may come on.

e Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. 1f suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely dete- riorated the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC OFF indica- tor light may come on.

«+ When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads.

e When g on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface

+ If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the vehicle dy- namic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic con- trol off indicator light may come on.

e The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so equipped)

ANTI-FRÉEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY Ithe battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- mum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Starting and driving 5-21

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER I the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see “Changing engine coolant”inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave- ment. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability informa- tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some US states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

5-22 Starting and driving

8. Tire chains may be used.

À CAUTION Tire chains/cables cannot be installed on P245/45R18 size tires. Installation of the tire chains/cables on P245/45R18 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should install P225/55R17 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited accord- ing to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size or the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's sug- gestions. Use only SAE Class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve- hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clear- ances between the tire and the closest ve- hicle suspension or body component re- quired to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain ten- sioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure à tight fit

Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibil- ity of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

e_ A scraper and stiff-bristied brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

e A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

e_ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

DRIVING ON SNOW ORICE A WARNING

e Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “gri these conditions. Try to avoid di wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

e Whatever the condition, drive with cau- tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

e Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

e Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

e Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reach- ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

e Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads.

e Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold

temperature starting is available through a NISSAN dealer.

A WARNING Do not use your heater with an un- grounded electrical system or two- pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Starting and driving 5-23

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

5-24 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Changing a flat tire Jump starting Push starting.

.. 6-2 .. 6-2 .. 6-6

If your vehicle overheats .

Towing your vehicle... ee Towing recommended by NISSAN …… Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

FLAT TIRE CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.

2. Tum on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and applythe parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to wam other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person- nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

6-2 In case of emergency

e Make sure the parking brake is securely ied and the manual transmission is d into R (Reverse), or the auto- matic transmission into P (Park).

+ Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- sional road assistance.

Place suitable blocks (D at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire © to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

A WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

LCE0074 LCEOO75 LCEO076

Getting the spare tire and tools Type À Type B Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and spare tire cover. Remove the jack (D and wheel nut wrench () from the tool box. Remove the spare tire.

In case of emergency 6-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

e Never get under the vehicle while it supported only by the jack. If i nec- essary to work under the vehicle, sup- port it with safety stands.

e Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

6-4 In case of emergency

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. Th especially true for vehicles with limited slip

differentials. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc- tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the two notches in the front or the rear as shown Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown

The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

8. Toliftthe vehicle, securely hold the jacklever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re- move the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be- tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-5

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated (@), ®), ©, ©),

®)). Lower the vehicle completely.

e Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

e Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- hicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-Ib (108 N:m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to Specifications at each lubrication interval.

6-6 In case of emergency

Adijust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire placard affixed to the center console.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip- ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se- cured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

e The spare tire is designed for emer- gency use. See specific instructions un- der the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be fol- lowed.

e If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

e Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vi ty of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor- rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, imme- diately flush the contacted area with water.

e Keep battery out of the children.

The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

+ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

e Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se- rious injury.

e Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

A WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury. 1. Ifthe booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their bat- teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

In case of emergency 6-7

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com- partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve- hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en- gine of the vehicle being jump started

ACAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon- nectthe negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-8 In case of emergency

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

+ Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. At- tempting to do so may cause transmis- sion damage.

e Three-way catalyst equipped models Should not be started by pushing. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.

+ Never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward Surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

e Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is com- ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped). Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

8. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

1f steam or water is coming from the en- gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- gine.

A WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.

6. Afterthe engine cools down, check the cool- ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

In case of emergency 6-9

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. incorrect towing equipment could dam- age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera- tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. I is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

e When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powerti are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.

e Always attach safety chains before towing.

6-10 In case of emergency

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing" in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

e Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

e When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on towing dollies, or when towing manual trans- mission models with the front wheels on the ground:

— Turn the ignition key to the OFF po- tion, and secure the steerii

nition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism.

— Move the gearshift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

e When towing automatic or manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

e Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

In case of emergency 6-11

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

+ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.

+ Do notuse the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks.

e Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle.

e Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus- pension, steering, brake or cooling systems.

e Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Tumoffthe Vehicle Dynamic Control System if so equipped)

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

6-12 In case of emergency

8. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back- ward.

e Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

Release the accelerator pedal before shiftng between R and D (automatic transmission models) or 1st and R (manual transmission models).

5. the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

e Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

+ Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.

e Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus- pension, steering, brake or cooling systems.

+ Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at an angle.

+ Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.

I your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Tum offthe Vehicle Dynamic Control System (if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

Tum the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back- ward.

Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D (automatic transmission models) or 1st and R (manual transmission models).

. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-13

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

6-14 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior Cleaning interior..…7-4 Washing Floor mats 7-4 Waxing.… Seat belts ….. 7-5 Removing spots …. Corrosion protection. due Le 7-5 Underbody Most common factors contributing to vehicle Glass . corrosion 7-5 Aluminum alloy wheels . Environmental factors influence the rate of Chrome parts COTOSION 7-5 Tire dressings.… To protect your vehicle from corrosion . 7-6

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

e_ after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.

e_ after driving on coastal roads.

when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.

when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care

e Do not wash the vehicle strong household soap, strong chemical deter- gents, gasoline or solvents.

+ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

e Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughiy with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regular. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

À damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

e Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- riod and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean ifthe high-mounted stop light is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light @ Push toward rear of vehicle. @ Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

ACAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win- ter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with à non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub- ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

Appearance and care 7-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and tai the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

e_ Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat- ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing,

e_Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove)

e_ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

e_Alow the tire dressing to dry as recom- mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

7-4 Appearance and care

CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fab- ric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

e Never use benzine, thinner or any si lar material.

e Small particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, polishes, oils, clean-

solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.

+ Never use fabric protectors unless rec- ommended by the manufacturer.

e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positione the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- come excessively worn.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

WAI0OO6| Floor mat positioning aid (driver's side only)

This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve- hicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system” section of this manual.

A WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

CORROSION PROTECTION MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

e_ The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

Damage to paint and other protective coat- ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Appearance and care 7-5

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Temperature À CAUTION High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- le NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. bris from the passenger compartment : h by washing it out with a hose. Remove

Air pollution dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are FROM CORROSION extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion e_ Washandwax yourvehicle oftentokeepthe and deterioration of underbody components

vehicle clean. such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders:

e_ Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. + Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation For additional protection against rust and corro- Check the underbody for accumulation of Sion: which may be required in some areas, con- ATP Rens suit à NISSAN dealer.

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

7-6 Appearance and care

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/22/05—tbrooks =1

8 Maintenance and do-

Maintenance requirements. …

General maintenance .

Explanation of general maintenance items

Maintenance precautions.… eee Engine compartment check locations Engine cooling system .… Checking engine coolant level Changing engine coolant…. Engine oil... Checking engine oil level . Changing engine oil . Changing engine oil fiter 5-speed automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid. . Brake and clutch fluid. Brake fluid. Clutch fluid Window washer fluid . Window washer fluid reservoir Battery Jump starting Drive belts.… Spark plugs..…

Replacing spark plug - diiiiiiie..816 Air cleaner. In-cabin microfier. Windshield wiper blades Cleaning Replacing . …. Parking brake and brake pedal Checking parking brake Checking brake pedal Brake booster. Fuses .… ee Engine compartment. eee . Passenger compartment Keyfob battery replacement. Lights ….… Headlights…. . Exterior and interior lights. Wheels and tires . Tire pressure... Tire labeling.… Types of tires.… Tire chains.… Changing wheels and tres

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some daÿ-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- SAN's good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance.

I is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide." You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day op- ration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- eration. lt is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualiied technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economic way.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be per- formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptiy. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau- tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this sec:

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequentiy

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance [f the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a Straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. Ifthe steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when per- forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following items with an “*”’ is found later in this sec- tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check

the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the floor mat away from the pedal

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Clutch pedal* Make sure the pedal operates smoothly and check that it has the proper free travel.

Parking brake* Check that the lever has the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt web- bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes inthe steer- ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out ofthe defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel)

Automatic transmission fluid level* Check the level after putting the selector lever in P with the engine idling at operating temperature.

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected imme- diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex- posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thor- oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” section of this manual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) |06/22/05—tbrooks =1

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau- tions which should be closely observed.

e Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. For manual transmission models, move the shift lever to N (Neu- tral). For automatic transmission mod- els, move the selector lever to P (Park).

e Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

+ Never leave the engine or automatic ion related component har- connected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

e Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

e Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the

ignition key is in the OFF position and the

engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces- Sary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

On gasoline engine models with the multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

+ Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

+ Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. AI- ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail- able. See “Owner's Manual/Service Manual or- der information” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplet or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil filer cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Clutch fluid reservoir (M/T model) Air cleaner

Transmission dipstick (A/T models) Engine oil dipstick

Windshield washer fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The engine cooling system is filed at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti- freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

+ Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

e The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- gine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

Outside temperature Genuine | Demineral-

down to NISSAN ized or dis-

Long Life | tilled water — = Antifreeze/ c F Coolant or equivalent

À CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as or- ange, may damage the engine cooling system.

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ing.

+ To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en- gine is hot.

e Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

e Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks (®). This is the normal oper- ating oil level range. K the oil level is below the L (Low) mark (@), remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill ©.

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

À CAUTION Oil level should be checked regular; erating the engine with an insuffi amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

… Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off

. Remove the oil filler cap @ by turning it

. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

. Remove the drain plug ®) with a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

I the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See “Changing engine oil filter” later in this section.

e Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

e Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

+ Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

ACAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

e Waste oil must be disposed of prop- erly.

e Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer, Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 - 29 ft-Ib (29 - 39 N-m)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 07/06/05—betty =1

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filer opening, then install the oil filer cap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con- sumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

8-10 Maintenance and do

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the mounting surface of the engine

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil fier until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 WDI0495 minutes. Check the oil level, Add engine oil if CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER necessary.

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Tum the engine off. 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter @).

4. Loosen the oil filter (@) with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by tuning it by hand.

À CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 07/06/05—betty =1

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

e Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.

e Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in drive- ability and automatic transmission du- rability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.

POWER STEERING FLUID

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

e Recommended fluid is Genuine

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

A WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch sys- tems. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability.

A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is led, immediately wash the surface with water.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. f fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CLUTCH FLUID Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir (manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre- quently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

WINDOW WASHER FLUID LDI0335

WINDOW WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fillthe window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid waming light comes on (if so equipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's in- structions for the mixture ratio.

Refil the reservoir more frequentiy when driving conditions require an increased amount of win- dow washer fluid

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- freeze or equivalent.

e Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

+ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water.

e_ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solu- tion of baking soda and water

e Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

e_lfthe vehicle is not to be used for 80 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

«+ Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener- ated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

e Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat- tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e When working on or near a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

e Battery posts, terminals and related ac- cessories contain lead and lead com- pounds. Wash hands after handling.

e Keep battery out of the reach of children.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING H jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency" section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

3 1 2 4 WDI0226 1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Crankshaft 8. Generator 4. Air conditioner A WARNING

ignition key is in the OFF or ion. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un- usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi- tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance _schedule found in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol- low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re- gapping.

e Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

A WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

H replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance.

AIR CLEANER LDI0336|

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte- nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth- ers to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfil fitisn’tthere, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

e Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air- bome dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for change intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce- dure:

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins. Remove the glove box from the opening and let it hang by the cord

2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unit by disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot- tom of the cover.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

The filter is marked “UP” with an arrow. The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle.

8. Slide the filter into the housing,

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CORRECT INSTALLATION INCORRECT INSTALLATION

Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2 supporting tabs on the housing.

4. Replace the cover by inserting the upper tabs inside the housing slot and pushing the hook tabs until they snap on to the housing lip.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

CLEANING H your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside ofthe windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind- shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

AACRUTION arm until it clicks into place.

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver ACAUTION ne e After wiper blade replacement, return REPLACING the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

+ Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be dam- aged from wind pressure.

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. @ Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

@ Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove.

@® Remove the wiper blade.

WD10337 | Be careful not to let anything get into the washer nozzle @). This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If something gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. the number of clicks is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer.

e_7-8 clicks under pulling force of 44 Ib (196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL With the engine running, check the distance À between the upper surface of the pedal and the

metal floor, K it is out of the range shown, see a NISSAN dealer.

Distance A: Under depression force of 110 Ib (490 N)

Automatic Manual Transmission Transmission 3.55 in (90.3 mm) 3.81 in (84 mm) or more or more

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

A WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re- placement, a high pitched scraping or screech- ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or notthe brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible ifthe wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa- sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

8-22 Maintenance and do

Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte- nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”.

BRAKE BOOSTER Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release the brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the engine. The pedal height should drop a little.

8. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change

4. Run the engine for one minute without de- pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is re- leased from the booster.

H the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Two types of fuses are used. Type Ais used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type À fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type À fuses can be installed in the engine com- pariment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Ha type À fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under- hood fuse boxes. Only use type À fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

I any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood

8. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center ofthe fuse block in the passenger compartment.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

5. lfthe fuse is open @), replace it with a new fuse ®).

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

I any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

4. Ifthe fuse is open @), replace it with a known

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT LDI0484| Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent

@ Close the lid securely.

5. Press the {f) button, thenthe button two or three times to check the key- fob operation.

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows: @ Open the lid using a coin @. @ Remove the battery (®).

Install a new batte: with the “+" facini Ty g down.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5.

e An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

e The keyfob is water-resistant; how- ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.

e The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions.

Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation of the device.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS Replacing the xenon headlight bulb

A WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE When xenon headlights are on, they pro- duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric shock, never attempt to modify or disas- semble. Always have your xenon head- lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Headlight and turn signal switch” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be- cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your NISSAN dealer.

e Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

+ Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

+ Only touch the plastic base when han- dling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could sig- nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-

e High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

e Use the same number and wattage as originally installed:

Low beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012*

High beam: Wattage: 55 Bulb no.: 9012*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart- ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

tem Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

High/low (Halogen) 55 9012

High/low (Xenon) (special) D2s

Day time running lamp - 1156

Park/Turn 27/8 1157NA Comering 27 3156K Front fog light 55 Hs Front personal/map lights 34 - Console box illumination 38 194 Glove box light (f so equipped) 34 158 Vanity mirror light 241 - Step light 38 194 Rear personal lamps 8 - Rear console box light 5 Wow High-mounted stop light 5 Wow Trunk light 34 158 Rear combination light

Tail/Stop/Tum 27/5 8057K Backup (reversing) 13 912

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Map light Rear personal lights Step light

Rear combination light License plate light Trunk light High-mount stoplight Headlamp assembly Fog light

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.

Ê Indicates bulb removal

fi Indicates bulb installation

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Front personal/map lights — Type A Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

Front personal/map lights — Type B Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

ES Step light 4 Use a cloth (D to protect the housing.

Rear personal light Use a cloth ® to protect the housing.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Rear console box light Trunk light

Squeeze the tabs on the connector. Pull out the bulb.

High-mounted stop light

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

WHEELS AND TIRES If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long dis- tance trips. The recommended tire pres- sure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres- sure” heading. The Tire and Loading Infor- mation label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:

e Most tires naturally lose air over time.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Ifthe tires are used at speeds above 100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example), the cold tire inflation pressure must be increased. Re- fer to "Checking tire pressure” later in this section.

Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire inflation pressure when the vehicle speed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un- der inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

e The Gross Maximum Weight rat- ing is located on the FMVSS la- bel. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Load- ing Information label (if so equipped). Do not load your ve- hicle beyond this capacity. Over- loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operat- ing conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable han- dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified ca- pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

e Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

Maintenance and do-i

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e Increase the cold tire inflation pressure as indicated in "Check- ing tire pressure” later in this sec- tion when using the tires speci- fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example). Failure to increase the cold tire inflation pressure may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. After such use, readjust tire pressure.

e Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire fail- ure, loss of control and possible injury.

e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Type A Tire and loading information label (for US) (if so equipped)

@ Seating capacity: The maximum num- ber of occupants that should be seated in the vehicle.

@ Recommended cold tire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pres- sure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recom- mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal- ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicles GVWR.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” later in this section.

Type B Tire and loading information label (for US)

® Seating capacity: The maximum num- ber of occupants that should be seated in the vehicle.

@ Vehicle load limit: See loading infor- mation in the “Technical and con- sumer information” section.

® Recommended cold tire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pres- sure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recom- mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal- ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicles GVWR.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

@ Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

® Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped).

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica- tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

LDID358)| 6. Install the valve stem cap. Checking tire pressure 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, 1. Remove the valve stem cap from the including the spare. tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side- ways, or air will escape. lfthe hissing of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposi- tion the gauge to eliminate this leak- age.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

High Speed/ Maximum Load Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

*: “R''or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information iden- tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro- vides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

@ Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 5. Two-digit number: This number is the

1. P: The "P' indicates the tire is de-

wheel or rim diameter in inches.

signed for passenger vehicles. 6. Two- or three-digit number: This number is the tire's load index. It is a

2. Three-digit number: This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall

measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires be-

edge. cause it is not required by law.

8. Two-digit number: This number, 7, Tire speed rating. You should not known as the aspect ratio, gives the drive the vehicle faster than the tire tire's ratio of height to width. speed rating.

4. R: The "R" stands for radial.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of Transportation.” The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of Tire Identification Number.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For ex- ample, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2008. Ifthese numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

@ Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber- coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur- ers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

@ Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible in- flation pressure.

@ Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car- ried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in- stalled tire.

Indicates whether the tire requires an in- ner tube (“tube type") or not (“tubeless”).

The word "radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Maintenance and do-i

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES A WARNING

e When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type ., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

8-40 Maintenance and do

e Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

e For additional information regarding es, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- n” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- n Booklet.

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- els to provide good performance all year, includ- ing snowy and icy road conditions. AI Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry road. Summer tire performance is substantially re- duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S" on the tire sidewall.

I you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

I snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilties of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

TIRE CHAINS A CAUTION Tire chains/cables cannot be installed on P245/45R18 size tires. Installation of the tire chains/cables on P245/45R18 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should install P225/55R17 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class "S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de- signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the pos- sibility of whipping action damage to the fenders

or underbody. f possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor- mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer- gency” section of this manual for tire re- placing procedures.

As soon as possible, wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

The wheel nuts must be kept tight- ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

e After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.

e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Wearindicator 2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

e Tires should be periodically in- spected for wear, cracking, bulg- ing or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

e The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

+ Theuse oftires other than those recom- mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, s-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to- tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these ef- fects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

+ If the wheels are changed for any rea- son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics and/or terference with the brake cs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re- fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.

+ Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

e The use of retread tires is not recommended. e For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet.

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal- anced as required

Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet .

e_ Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

e NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (if so equipped)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM- PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident

e The spare tire should be used for emer- gency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first oppor- tunity to avoid possible tire or differen- tial damage.

e Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid Sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.

e Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Q When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the front (original) tires.

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

e Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause dam- age to the vehicle.

e Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants ..9-2 Fuel recommendation . . ..9-8 Engine oil and oil filter recommendetion 9-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number . ..9-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 9-6

Specifications. 9-7 Engine 9-7 Wheels and tires 9-8 Dimensions and weights .…. 9-8

When traveling or registeing your vehicle in

Towing load/specification

Flat towing. Uniform tire quality grading Emission control system warranty Reporting safety defects (US only) Readiness for inspection/maintenance (1/M) test Event data recorders. en Owner's Manual/Senvice Manual order information. ...9-23

In the event of a collision

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refi described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

ng, follow the procedure

Capacity (Approrimate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Lier Fuel 20 gal 16-578 gal 756 Unisaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI(RON 91)°1 Engine oil °7 Drain and Refil With oil flter change 4-1/2 at 3-3/4 qt 42 + API Certification Mark *2 *3 Without oil fier change _4-1/4 qt 83-172 qt 40 ae Eco nsenving "28 Cooling system With reservoir 2-1/4 gal 17/8 gal 85 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent 50% Demineralzed or distiled water Manual transmission gear oil 238 qi 2at 22 Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL:4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 Automatic transmission fluid Ref to the proper level according to the instructions in Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF “4 Power steering fluid (PSF) the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.'8 Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid'5 or equivalent DOT 3 Mult- purpose grease — — = NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) Air conditioning system reMgerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)"6 Air conditioning system oil — — = NISSAN A/C System OI Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent 6 Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid

“1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation." “2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations."

“8: For further details, see “Recommended SAË viscosity number."

“4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the auto- matic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

“5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.

“6: For further details, see "Air conditioner specification label."

+7: For further details, see “Changing engine oil."

*8: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (AT), DEXRON" II/MERCON", or equivalent ATF may also be used,

9-2 Technical and consumer information

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91).

For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec- ommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).

e Using a fuel other than that spe: could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the Worid-Wide Fuel Charter specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle perfor- mance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the Worid-Wide Fuel Charter specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy- genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de- termined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

e The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

e If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve- hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall- ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec- tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc) which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se- vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

9-4 Technical and consumer information

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en- countered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light Spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

e Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

e E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

e U.S. government regulations requi ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia- tion or the appropriate percentage for that region.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose engine oil with the cor- rect quality and viscosity to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. NISSAN recom- mends the use of a low friction oil (energy con- serving oil) in order to improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Only those engine oils with the American Petro- leum Institute (API) CERTIFICATION MARK on

the front of the container should be used. This type of oil supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or SJ and Energy Conserving Il categories.

If you cannot find engine oil with the API CERTI- FICATION MARK, use API grade SL Energy Conserving oil. An oil with a single designation SL, or in combination with other categories (for example, SL/CF) may also be used if one with the API CERTIFICATION MARK cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-IIl oil can also be used.

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. These oils must, however, meet the API quality and SAE viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- sary when the proper oil type is used and main- tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper- ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec- ommended SAE viscosity number" shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause seri- ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter, When re- placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil fikter or its equivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals”.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and fiter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.

Your engine was filed with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more fréquent oil and filter changes:

+ repeated short distance driving at cold out- side temperatures

stop and go commuting

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Outside Temperature Range Anticipated Before Next Oil Change

GASOLINE ENGINE OIL ATI1028

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER

e SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE 10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if the ambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger- ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN A/C system oil DH-PS or the exact equiva- lents.

ACAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or cause severe damage to the air con ing system and will require the replace- ment of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regula- tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys- tem service. À NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger- ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model VOS5DE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement

6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° in (mm) 8.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4) cu in (cm) 218.45 (3,498) 1-2-3-4-5-6

MT AIT (in “N' position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle

See the “Emission Control Information label” on the under- side of the hood.

Spark plug gap (Nominal)

in (mm) _0.048 (1.1)

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Wheels Overall length in (mm) 198.5 (4,915) 17x71) Overall width in (mm) 71.7 (1,821) 18x7.5)) Overall height in(mm) 58.8 (1,480) Tires Front tread P225/55R17 95V 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.4 (1,560) P245/45R18 96V 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.0 (1,549) Spare tire Rear tread Temporary T145/80*17 17 inch tire in (mm) 61.6 (1,565) Full size 17"or18" 18 inch tire in (mm) 61.2 (1,554) Speed rating 17 H Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2 (2,824) 18" V Gross vehicle weight Ib(kg) Sce the “FMVS.S. :“R" or “D” depending on tire manufacturer rating certification label” on the Gross axle weight rating center pillar between the Front Ib (kg) drivers side front and Rear Ib (kg) roar doors.

9-8 Technical and consumer information

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi- cle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. Al gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There- fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis- sion control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; there- fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district cations, transpor- tation, and registration are the responsibi ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION LTI0069)|

(VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identifica- tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la- bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu- able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at- tached as shown.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Type A TIRE PLACARD The cold tire pressure is shown on the tire plac- ard. The tire placard is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that the following parts are enclosed in the plastic bag

e_ License plate bracket e_ License plate bracket screws x 2 e_ License plate screws x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using a 0.89 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the area behind the fascia, apply only light pres- sure to the dhill

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in the bumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using the two longer screws.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws to mount the license plate to the license plate bracket.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

e Itis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- ously injured or killed.

e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

© Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, flu- ids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not in- clude passengers and cargo.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e _GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

e GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle.

e_GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your ve- hicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity” on Tire and Loading Information label.

To get "the combined weight of occu- pants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown below.

Load limit 1,400 Ib (640 kg)

a Occupants Luggage D Rermaining available

load capacity = 150 1b x 5 = 750 Ib 30 Ib x 5 = 150 lb 500 lb ( GOkg) (40k9) Gakg) (0k9 ] (e27k9) LTI0152

Technical and consumer information 9-13

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Steps for determining correct load

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.

. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 Ib. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capac- ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 * 150) = 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 * 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be trans- ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this re- duces the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm the you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Measurement of Weights” later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres- sures. See the Tire and Loading label.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

or GAWR as specified on the F.M- .V.S.S. certification label.

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or colli- sion, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRSs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could oc- cur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak- ing distances. This may cause a premature e failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

TOWING A TRAILER A WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor- mance and may lead to accidents.

e Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

e For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak- ing and other systems.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load/Speciication Chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

Towing loads greater than specified or using improper towing equipment could adversely af- fect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro- priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or in low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

ACAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

—————— x 100 =9 to 11% Total trailer load

LÀ Gross vehicte weight = A Gross axie weight

Keep the tongue load between 9 - 11 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart. If the tongue load be- comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Maximum gross vehicle weight/ maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certification label. The gross vehicle weight equals the com- bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen- gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear gross axle weight must not exceed the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the F. M. V. S. S. certification label.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION UNIT: lb (kg) MAXIMUM TOWING LOAD 1,000 (454) MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 100 (45) TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. À genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve- hicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Choose a hitch ball ofthe proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

e_ The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

+ Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.

e_ The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Sway control devices are used to help control the effects of sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles. Make sure the sway control device is compatible with the trail- er's brake system

Class | trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 Ib (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to the vehicle that has a 2,000 Ib (909 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of

towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in this section.

A CAUTION Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact- absorbing bumper.

e Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys- tem, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.

e To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use.

e After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water

or dust from entering the passenger compartment.

e Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit tuning corners.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

À CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power- type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 mps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys- tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob- tain the proper equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu- table trailer dealer.

I your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

A WARNING Never connect a trailer brake system di- rectly to the vehicle brake system.

e Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, wo suspension or other possible causes of either condition.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve- hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

e Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

In order to gain skil and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice tuming, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor- mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving

e Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Some states or provinces have spe- cific speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

e_ When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowiy. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.

e_ Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so, and if your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic transmission, first block the wheels and apply the parking brake, and then move the

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

transmission shift selector lever into the P (Park) position. If you move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When going up a long grade, downshit the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over- loading and/or overheating.

H the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position

Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.

Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km).

For the first 500 miles that you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”.

e_ When making a turn, your trailer wheels wi be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make à larger than normal turning radius during the turn

© Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- ing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- hicle handling. f swaying does occur, firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead, and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve- hicle speed. This combination will help sta- bilize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

e Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires con- siderably more distance than normal pass- ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.

e To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use 5th gear (manual transmission) or overdrive (automatic transmission).

e_Avoïd holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

e_ Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

e_ Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer.

When towing a trailer, transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre- quently. For additional information, see the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

e Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ways tow forward, never backward.

e DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

Automatic Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.

+ Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.

© After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neu- ral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on tire wear rate when tested under controlled conditions on specified government test courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern- ment course as a tire graded 100. However, relative tire performance depends on actual driv- ing conditions, and may vary significantly due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, À, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, À, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. À tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

A WARNING The traction grade assigned to your ve- hicle tires is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests and does not in- clude acceleration, cornering, hydroplan- ing or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature À, B and C Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent a tire's resistance to heat build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- perature can cause tire material to degenerate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a performance level which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades À and B rep- resent higher levels of performance on laboratory test wheels than the minimum required by law.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei- ther separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:

For USA 1. Emission Defects Warranty 2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. f you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re- placement by writing to:

e_ Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department PO. Box 191 Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada Emission Control System Warranty

e_ Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, LAW 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a de- fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi- ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be- come involved in individual problems be- tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327- 4236. You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve- hicle safety from the Hotline.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05—tbrooks =1

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re- quired to be in what is called the “ready condi- tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

I a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready" condition. Before taking the UM test check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condi- tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is "not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready." f the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready” con- dition, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

A WARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con- ions and obey all traffic laws.

. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. AI- low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal oper- ating temperature).

. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds.

8. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of 53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

.… Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 min- utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se- lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off. 10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept- able between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed.

[+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

EVENT DATA RECORDERS Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput- ers that monitor and control a number of systems to optimize performance and help service techni- cians with diagnosis and repair. Depending on the equipment on your vehicle, some oftthe com- puters monitor emission control systems, braking systems, engine systems, transmission systems, tire pressure systems, and airbag systems. Some data about vehicle operation may be stored in the computer for use during servicing. Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs. For ex- ample, air bag readiness, air bag performance, and seat belt use by the driver or passenger may be recorded, depending on vehicle equipment. These types of systems are sometimes called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access the electronic data that may be stored in the vehicle's computers (sounds are not recorded). NISSAN and NISSAN dealers have equipment to access some of this data; others may also have this equipment. The data may be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing or for special research. lt might also be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in response to a request by law enforcement, or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

À genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro- cedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Ouner's Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner's Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact:

Tweddie Litho Company 1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals for this model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser- vice Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800- 387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa- tive will assist you:

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Ovwner's Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION Unfortunately, accidents do oceur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN's original exacting specifica- tions — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN's warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro- tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un- necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non- genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of- ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz- ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro- tect you, so you can take action to protect your- self.

If you should need further information visit us at www.nissanusa.com.

9-24 Technical and consumer information

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Active head restraint Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . .... Air bag system Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) Air bag warning light. . Air cleaner housing filter . . . 8-16 Air conditioner Air conditioner service . . Air conditioner specification label Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . ... nee Servicing air conditioner . . . Alarm system (See vehicle security system) : Anchor point locations . . . . .. . Antenna . Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . Anti-lock brake warning int. Armrests Audible reminders. . Audio system . .. .. AM-FM radio with cassette player. Cassette player . . Compact Disc (CD) changer . . .... Compact disc (CD) player . . .. .... FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player and compact disc (CD) changer. . . . . 4 4-24

FM-AM-SAT radio with cassette player

and compact disc (CD) player. . . .. . . 4-24 Radio 4-20 Steering wheel audio control switch. . . 4-33

Automatic Automatic drive positioner . . . . . Automatic power window switch Driving with automatic transmission. Transmission selector lever lock release. 5-10

Battery. Charge warning light . Before starting the engine Belts (See drive belts) Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . Booster seats. Brake Antock brake system (A8) . Brake booster. . . . Brake fluid . Brake light (See step in. Brake pedal . Brake system . . . . . . Brake waming light . . Brake wear indicators . Parking brake check .…. Parking brake operation...

Self-adjusting brakes ... 8-22 Break-in schedule. . . 5-14 Brightness control

Instrument panel . Brightness/Contrast button.

Control panel buttons. . . .. Bulb check/instrument panel. . .…. Bulb replacement. .

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . Car phone or CB radio. . Cargo (See vehicle loading information) Cassette player (See audio system) CD care and cleaning CD changer (See audio system). . CD player (See audio system). . . Child restraint with top tether strap Child restraints. . . . . .. 1-12, 1-18, 1-18, 1-25 Precautions on child restraints . . 1-18, 1-31 Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-27 Child safety rear door lock. . . . . Chimes, audible reminders. Cigarette lighter. . Cleaning exterior and interior Clock (models with navigation system). . . . . (models without navigation system). .

Clutch fluid l 8-12 C.MV.S.S. certification label. . 9-10 Cold weather driving . . 5-21 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . 4-29

Compass display . Console box. . . Control panel buttons

With navigation system .

Without navigation system. . . 4-2 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . 4-33

Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants. . . .. .. Changing engine coolant Checking engine coolant level. Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 2-5

Daytime running light system (Canada only). 2-23 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch Dimensions and weights. .…. Display controls (see control panel buttons). . . 4-2, 4-7

Door locks Door open warning light Drive belts. . Drive positioner, Automatic. Driving Cold weather driving Driving with automatic transmission. Driving with manual transmission .… Precautions when starting and driving . .5-2

Economy - fuel Emission control information label... Emission control system warranty . . . . Engine Before starting the engine . . . . 5-6 Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants. . Changing engine coolant . . . Changing engine oil... . .. Changing engine oil filter

Checking engine coolant level. . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . .. 8-8 Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 Engine cooling system ...8-7 Engine oil . . . ...8-8

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5 Engine oil pressure warning light

Engine oil viscosity . Engine serial number Engine specifications. . . . . . Starting the engine .

English/Metric button . . Control panel buttons ENTER button Enter button Control panel buttons Event data recorders . . . . Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) Eyeglass case.

Floor mat positioning aid. . Fluid Brake fluid. l 8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . Clutch fluid Engine coolant Engine oil . . Power steering fluid. . . Window washer fluid . . FMV.S.S. certification label . Fog light switch. . Folding rear seat . . .... Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . 1-42 Front seats Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . Fuel economy . Fuel gauge

Glove box . . Glove box lock Grocery hooks

Hazard warning flasher switch . Head restraints . . . . .. Active head restraint . Headlight and turn signal switch. Headlight control switch .

Heated seats . . .... 2-26 Heated steering wheel . 2-27 Heater

Heater operation .…. 4-19 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . 2-44

Hood release . . . .. Hom .

Ignition switch... . Immobilizer system. Important vehicle information label. 9-10 In-cabin microfilter . . 28417 increasing fuel economy . . 5-15 Indicator lights and audible reminders

Installing the license plate... 9-12 Light

Air bag warning light... . .. . Brake light (See stop light) Bulb check/instrument panel. Bulb replacement . Charge warning light . Cornering light Fog light switch Headlight and tum signal switch. Headlight control switch . . . . . Interior light = Light bulbs. Low washer fluid warning light. Passenger air bag and status light. . Personal lights .

Trunk light . Waming/indicator lights and audible reminders . 2-10

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Lock Child safety rear door lock Door locks Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. Glove box lock

Trunk lid lock opener lever Low fuel warning light. . . .

Low washer fluid warning light. .2-12 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M Maint (maintenance) button

Control panel buttons. . . 4-5, 4-9 Maint (Maintenance) button, control panel display.

Maintenance General maintenance . . Inside the vehicle. . . Maintenance precautions Outside the vehicle. . … . Seat belt maintenance . . . . Under the hood and vehicle .

Malfunction indicator light . .

Manual front seat adjustment

N NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system. . 2-17, 8-2, 5-5

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4 Odometer .. Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. Changing engine ol... Changing engine oil filter Checking engine oil level . . . Engine oil . . Engine oil and oil lter recommendation . 9-5 Engine oil viscosity . . Outside mirror control . Outside mirrors . . . . . Overheat I your vehicle overheats Owner's manual order form Owner's manual/service manual order information. . 9-28

Parking Parking brake check … Parking brake operation Parking/parking on hills.

Power Power door locks. . Power outlet. . Power rear windows . . . . Power steering fluid. . . . . Power steering system . . . Power windows. . Rear power windows.

Maintenance precautions . . . . . .... 8-5 Precautions on child restraints . . 1-18, 1-31 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .. 1-10 Precautions on supplemental restraint

Precautions when starting and driving PREV button. « Prev button

Control panel buttons. . … . Programmable features .… Push starting

Radio AM-FM radio with cassette player... 4-28 Car phone or CB radio. . . Compact Disc (CD) changer . Steering wheel audio control switch. . Readiness for inspection maintenance (1/M)

Rear power windows Rear seat . .. Rear sun shade .

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) (06/23/05—tbrooks =1

Event data. Refrigerant recommendation Registering your vehicle in another country. . 9-9 Remote keyless entry system . .

Reporting safety defects (US only) . 9-21 s Safety Child safety rear door lock. . .. 4 3-5

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-21 Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . 1-2

Front power seat adjustment . . 1-4 Seat belt

Child safety . 1-12

Infants and small children. 1-13 Injured Person 1-14 Larger children. 1-13 Precautions on seat belt usage . 1-10 Pregnant women . 1-14 Seat belt extenders. . . . . 1-17 Seat belt maintenance . . . . 1-17 Seat belts . 1-10 Shoulder belt height adjustment . 1-16 Three-point type with retractor 1-14

Seat belt warning light . . . . 2-12

Seatback pockets. . . 2-81

Automatic drive positioner . . Front seats Heated seats

Manual front seat adjustment . . 1-2

Rear seat . . 1-6 Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start. . -17, 8-2, 5-5

Selt-adjusting brakes .… Service manual order form . Servicing air conditioner Setting button

SETTING button Shift lock release . . . Shifting

Automatic transmission

Manual transmission … Shoulder belt height adjustment Spark plug replacement Speedometer . SRS waming label . Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . 5-6 Jump starting .6-6 Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2 Push starting . 6-8 Starting the engine. 5-6

Startup Screen Control panel buttons . 48

Steering wheel audio control switch. .…

Sunroof 2-39 Supplemental air bag waming light. . 1-50, 2-12

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . 2-5 Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start ...-2-17,8-2,5-5 Three-way catalyst

Uniform tire quality grading.

Wheels and tires . . . .

Wheel/tire size . . . . Tire pressure display . Tire rotation maintenance reminder : Top tether strap child restraint Towing

Towing load/specification |

Trailer towing Traction control system (Tcs) off switch . Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . . 2-44 Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission.

Driving with manual transmission

Selector lever lock release . . . . . Travel (See registering your vehicle in another country) . Lee TRIP button . ... Tip button

Control panel buttons. . Tip odometer Trunk access through the rear seat : Trunk lid lock opener lever un Trunk light... ... Turn signal switoh. . .

U Uniform tire quality grading. . . « 9-20

Vanity mirror. Vehicle dimensions and weights

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-28 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-20 Vehicle electronic system... . . ... 412

Vehicle identification . . . . . .…. Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . Vehicle loading information Vehicle recovery . . Vehicle security system. . . . ..

Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle

immobilizer system), engine start . .2-17, 3-2, 5-5 Visors 3-15

wW Warning Air bag warning light. . . . 1-50, 2-12 Anti-lock brake warning light. . 2-10 Battery charge warning light . . ...2-11 Brake warning light . . . .... 22.211 Door open warning light ee .211 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . 2-11 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . ... 2-25 Low fuel waming light . 2-12

Low washer fluid warning light. . Passenger air bag and status light. . Seat belt warning light . . .. ... Vehicle security system. Warning labels (for SRS). Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders

Windows Locking passengers' windows. . Power rear windows . Power windows. . . . Rear power windows. . .

MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO MEMO GAS STATION INFORMATION RECOMMENDED FUEL:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91).

For improved performance, NISSAN recom- mends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96).

e Using a fuel other than that sp. could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL: e_ API Certification Mark e_ API grade SL, Energy Conserving e_ILSAC grade GF-IIl e_ 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oi filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE: See tire placard

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE" information found in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future re- liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

[= REVIEW COPY— 2006 Maxima (max) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 06/23/05 —tbrooks =1

1. Engine coolant 8-7

6. Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-35

18. Trunk release 3-9